JP7793464B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player by variably displaying specific identification information and deriving specific display results as a result of the variably displaying the specific identification information.

Pachinko gaming machines, typified by gaming machines, have the ability to variably display multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative symbols) in response to the variably displayed specific identification information (special symbols) (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing a step-up effect in which the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device changes in stages, with the display screen of the liquid crystal display device being likened to glass, and after displaying a crack (a glass plate as an image that signals a crack) on the display screen, multiple images of broken pieces are displayed, as if the display screen had broken (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-86392 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-127593

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(A) A gaming machine that can variably display identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A predetermined effect can be executed that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image and then displaying a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image,
As a background image after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance, any one of a plurality of background images including a first predetermined background image and a second predetermined background image which suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first predetermined background image can be displayed;
Before displaying the fragment image in the predetermined effect, the object image in any one of a plurality of object image modes can be displayed;
Depending on the aspect of the object image, it is possible to suggest which background image will be displayed after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined effect,
The game can be controlled to a plurality of game states including a predetermined state and a specific state in which the average length of the variable display period of the identification information is shorter than that of the predetermined state;
In a presentation mode including a first presentation mode in the predetermined state and a second presentation mode in the predetermined state, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed;
In the first presentation mode, when the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually increased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually decreased,
In the first presentation mode, when variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first presentation mode is started, a fade-out display of the identification information can be executed in which the transparency of the identification information corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually increased;
In the first presentation mode, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first presentation mode is terminated, a fade-in display of the identification information can be executed in which the transparency of the identification information corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually decreased;
In the second presentation mode, when the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the second presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually increased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually decreased,
In the second presentation mode, when variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second presentation mode is started, a fade-out display of the identification information can be executed in which the transparency of the identification information corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually increased;
In the second presentation mode, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second presentation mode is terminated, a fade-in display of the identification information can be executed in which the transparency of the identification information corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually decreased;
an execution period of the identification information fade-in display in the first presentation mode is different from an execution period of the background fade-in display;
an execution period of the identification information fade-in display in the second presentation mode is different from an execution period of the background fade-in display;
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display in the first presentation mode is different from the execution period of the background fade-out display,
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display in the second presentation mode is different from the execution period of the background fade-out display,
the identification information includes a character representation,
As variable display of the identification information, a scroll action, a pre-start action in which the character display moves before the scroll action starts, a stop action when the scroll action stops, and a post-stop action in which the character display moves after the stop action can be executed,
the character display mode is different between the action at the time of stop and the action after the stop;
The length of the execution period of the fade-out display of the identification information in the first presentation mode is different from the length of the execution period of the fade-out display of the identification information in the second presentation mode.
It is characterized by:

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. This is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are figures showing the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) are figures showing the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) are figures showing the fourth presentation mode. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the manner in which the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. 1A is a diagram showing the decorative pattern change start action, (B) is a change stop action, and (C) is a loop action. FIG. 10A is a diagram comparing various decorative pattern actions with periods of lamp light emission control, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of loop lamp light emission control. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating examples of the operation of the hold display. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 26. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 28. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in FIG. 28. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as modified example 1. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 31. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern appears. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). This figure shows the flow of the decorative pattern stop display following Figure 36. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of decorative pattern stop displays when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a change in background. A diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, (B) is the second presentation mode, and (C) is the third and fourth presentation modes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. This figure shows an example of operation when a start winning occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing the flow of pseudo-consecutive announcements. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, (B) is a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed color determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of reach effects. A diagram showing the flow of reach effects following Figure 50. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of the operation of each part in reach performance. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation. This is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach presentation following Figure 53. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach performance. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing a second modified example of the present invention. 10A to 10D are diagrams showing a third modified example of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state or the special state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a random number value when a prize is won, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing variable categories. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram of whether or not a hold display effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram of a ratio for determining whether or not to execute a continuous breaking effect in a normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a dialogue preview effect setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a dialogue preview effect is executed in the normal state and the effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a background change is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio of the background change presentation, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a reach suggestion presentation is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in presentation is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the normal state and the effect patterns of the cracking effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the normal state and the effect patterns of the cracking effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the time-saving state and the special state, and the effect patterns of the break effect. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect. A diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β. A diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the first consecutive break effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the second consecutive break effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a dialogue preview performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change presentation B. A diagram showing details of some examples of the operation of pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a reach suggestion effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a reach suggestion effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a weak development effect. A diagram showing details of an example of the operation of a part of the strong development effect A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of strong development performance B. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of strong development performance B. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of a cut-in effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a jackpot. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a jackpot. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a miss. This is an explanatory diagram for comparing the details of each effect. This is an explanatory diagram for comparing the details of each effect. 10 is a timing chart showing details of the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect. 10 is a timing chart showing details of the dialogue preview performance. 10 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect A. 10 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect B. This is a timing chart showing details of the pseudo consecutive effects. This is a timing chart showing details of the reach suggestion effect. This is a timing chart showing details of the weak development effect. This is a timing chart showing details of strong development effect A. This is a timing chart showing details of the strong development effect B. 10 is a timing chart showing details of a cut-in effect. 10 is a timing chart showing details of the result notification presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the speed change of the fragment images in each performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a crack pattern in a crack effect. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating display examples of each crack pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in a crack pattern G. (A) is a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a cut-in effect. (A) shows the fragment image displayed in background change effect A, and (B) shows the fragment image displayed in strong development effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second modified example of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a third modified example of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a fourth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 5 of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a sixth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a seventh modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an eighth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example 9 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example 9 of the present invention. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a modified example 10 of the present invention.

The following describes the implementation of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the ornament identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (e.g., switching display; see FIG. 22(E) ) in which the reduced identification information is switched to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one piece of decorative identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decorative identification information, and during the period until the display of the one piece of decorative identification information is completed, the reduced identification information can be switched multiple times (for example, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern is completed, the small patterns are switched five times to small patterns of losing combinations, and are displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1<period Ta2). See FIG. 22(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326");
The display result of the variable display of the reduced symbol information is configured by a combination of the reduced symbol information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326");
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination does not become the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to statically display a confirmed decorative pattern of a losing combination (e.g., "326"), this part switches the display so that the small pattern of the losing combination, which is the same as the decorative pattern "326", is not displayed after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and before statically displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"); see FIG. 22(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched before the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information is derived so that the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination.Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the valid display area among the plurality of decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be enlarged from its normal size and then displayed in a manner that returns to the normal size (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a variable stop action when it temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern in a variable display based on a miss variable pattern. See Figures 36 to 38, 42, and 43).
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed (see Modification 3 of FIG. 57 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is also continuously performed when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 is executing a variable stop action when temporarily stopping and displaying a decorative pattern, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination of decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is temporarily enlarged to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area, and even when a non-specific combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, decoration identification information that is not located in the valid display area is not enlarged, so the player's gaze can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area and the load on display control can be reduced. Furthermore, since the predetermined light-emission control continues even when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, the control of the light-emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 28 to 30 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the back side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character images of the other decoration identification information are displayed while the number images are not displayed. After the one decoration identification information is erased, the number images of the other decoration identification information are displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 30(A) and (B), between being displayed in a frame-in state in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and being displayed out of the frame, (For example, a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") located at the back so as to overlap partially with the decorative pattern "2") may become visible through the decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 30 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the first decorative identification information, but in this case, the character image of the other decorative identification information located behind is displayed while the number image is not displayed, and the first decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the other decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of one decorative identification information and the number image of the other decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, preventing the number image of the first decorative identification information located in the front side from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing in transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 31 and 32 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located behind one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character image of the one decoration identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed. After the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figures 31(G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative patterns move in a curved manner from the front side to the back side. Therefore, between the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") is displayed in the frame-in display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is displayed out of the frame, the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") located behind the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") so as to partially overlap the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Variation 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the one decorative identification information, but in this case, the one decorative identification information located in the front side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the other decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the one decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of the other decorative identification information and the number image of the one decorative identification information do not overlap and this prevents the number image of the other decorative identification information located behind from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a rotation display in which the ornament identification information is rotated to alternately display the front and back sides of the ornament identification information (see FIGS. 33 and 34 ).
The decoration identification information is semi-transparent during the rotation display, and becomes opaque when the rotation display stops (see FIGS. 33 and 34).
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG051),
During the rotation display, the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information, which is in a semi-transparent state, is displayed, while the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 34 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotation display (for example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in a high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in this order based on a loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Modified example. See FIG. 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that not only the front side but also the back side of the decorative identification information can be seen through the display. In this case, the number images on the front side of the decorative identification information are displayed, but the number images on the back side are not displayed, so the number images on the front side and the number images on the back side of the decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the number images on the front side from becoming difficult to see. In addition, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotation display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
After the reach state is reached, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a first transparency (e.g., first transparency F1) until the reach line suggestion performance is executed, and after the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a second transparency (e.g., second transparency F2) that is lower than the first transparency (see FIG. 52 ).
After the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area (for example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2 which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. See FIGS. 50 to 52).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
When the reach line suggestion performance is executed, an enlarged display for enlarging the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separated display for separating the decorative identification information after the enlarged display are executed can be executed (see FIGS. 50 to 52 ).
The second period from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1; see FIG. 52 ).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 50(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third region, and the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions is enlarged and displayed for a first period and then spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decorative identification information that forms the reach state. Also, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 50(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to operate the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is repeatedly performed until the variable display of the special symbols is completed. See Figures 23(C), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly performed. See Figures 24(B), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed. See FIG. 44).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4. See FIG. 24A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed to prompt the player to change the display of the decorative identification information, while in the special state in which the variable display is likely to be performed, the variable display is not excessively prompted and the player feels annoyed. Furthermore, since the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
Information relating to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as reserved memory information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updates the number of reserved memories in the start winning determination process of step S101).
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the valid display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be enlarged from the normal size and then returned to the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, a part where a variable stop action can be executed when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern. See Figures 36 to 39).
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at a normal size regardless of the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, in a high base state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, if a variable display based on a shortened variable pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, a variable stop action is not executed and the size is maintained and the decorative identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. See Figures 39 and 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, interest is enhanced by providing variations in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops according to the number of reserved memories, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, the size is maintained while the decorative identification information is stopped so that its visibility is not impaired.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The period during which the background fade-out display is performed is longer than the period during which the identification information fade-out display is performed (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be scrolled until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21). See FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the shorter the fade-out display is performed, the more suddenly the impression is given that the display has disappeared. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-out display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-out display of the identification information and the fade-out display of the background, it is possible to prevent the start of variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is longer than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed of the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R starts to slow down until the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21). See FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, so if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-in display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the end of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-in display of the identification information and the fade-in display of the background, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A specific effect can be executed in which the variable display is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pseudo consecutive announcement" that determines whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, in other words, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner).
The decorative identification information has decorative identification information of multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) including a number image,
When the variable display is resumed in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can identify the number of times the variable display has resumed can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) (see FIGS. 48 and 49).
In the specific performance, there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are the same type, resulting in a first combination where the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, and there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, resulting in a second combination where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed, and both the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are the same type,
In the specific presentation, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination (for example, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are not the same, and a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a higher probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive prediction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest in the game is increased because it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of the number image of the decorative identification information temporarily displayed and the number and color of the count image if the specific effect is executed.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
When the variable display is not being executed, a waiting effect that displays a predetermined image can be executed (for example, a portion that can execute a "waiting-for-customer demo effect" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the effect control CPU 120 received a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command. See FIG. 46 ).
When the standby effect is being executed, the decorative identification information is not displayed, while the reduced identification information continues to be displayed (see FIG. 46 ).
If the start condition for the variable display is met while the waiting effect is being executed, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, and then, after the predetermined image is hidden, the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if a start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, then the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display is started. See FIG. 47).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decorative identification information begins after the specified image is hidden, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun when the conditions for starting the variable display are met, but since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the specified image is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 26 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and the normal state tends to be monotonous, making it more interesting when the variable display of the decorative identification information begins. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 26 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, upon the start of variable display of specific identification information, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, which can easily become monotonous, and the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information can be more interesting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required to perform the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 is completed, and the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period has completed. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of a specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows the time required for the switching display to be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not begin until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information beginning before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
In the first presentation mode, a moving display of the decoration identification information is executed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20(A1) and 20(A2)).
In the second presentation mode, a special variable display different from the moving display is executed as the variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20(B1) and (B2)).
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display period A22 when the scrolling display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scrolling display is executed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45(A) and 45(B))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner of variable display of the decorative identification information different from that in the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of variable display to the erasure of the decorative identification information is longer, so that the decorative identification information can be focused on for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined to be any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between a case where a predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 differ between a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. See Figures 45(A) and 45(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a predetermined variable display pattern is determined, the fade-out execution period differs between when the display is controlled in the first presentation mode and when the display is controlled in the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to predict that the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is met until the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed (for example, the variable display period of a special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and small pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period,
The related information image is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period and before the post-variable display period begins (for example, the name of the character (character related information) displayed in the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, that is, before the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins. See FIGS. 23(A) and 26).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decorative identification information starts, i.e., while it is statically displayed, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. Also, by erasing the related information image before the variable display starts, the player can focus attention on the variable display, preview effects, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the normal state, the display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes including a first display mode (e.g., the first display mode) and a second display mode (e.g., the second display mode) (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode. See FIG. 20 ).
In the special state, it is possible to control to a presentation mode including a third presentation mode (for example, a third presentation mode or a fourth presentation mode),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 26 );
In the second and third presentation modes, the decoration identification information is displayed without including the related information image (see FIGS. 28, 29, and 33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first presentation mode, the related information image is displayed to draw the player's attention to the related information image, thereby allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the related information image is erased, allowing the player to focus more on the variable display and preview presentation rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot will be achieved),
In the notification performance, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect (for example, in an SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(F)),
As the notification effect ends, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 53(G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed).
a specific image (e.g., specific image 002SG075) is displayed in an operational state adjacent to the number image of the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of decorative symbols for determining a jackpot that is displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 53(H) and (I)), while in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is not displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of decorative symbols for determining a jackpot that is displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 54(P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the effect of the presentation is enhanced and made more exciting by displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, but in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the specific image is not displayed in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, thereby giving a sense of speed to the variable display.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The performance control means
When the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, an erasure effect display (e.g., erasure effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the hold display is displayed when the erase effect display is displayed, the erase effect display continues to be displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold display starts (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. See FIG. 25 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest in the presentation from declining. Also, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, and the display of a new corresponding display allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 19 );
In the special state, the decorative identification information in the first area, the second area, and the third area is displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 19 );
The third area in the special state is disposed closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decorative identification information in the first and second areas is made to look larger, and the decorative identification information in the third area is shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned near the center of the display area, thereby increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative identification information.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of Figure 1 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols, and the small symbols are displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, right-hit notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 20) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 20) that indicates the number of remaining time-saving operations may be displayed in front of (higher layer than) the effect images such as characters, thereby preventing overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while decorative symbols may be displayed behind (lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol makes it possible to determine whether or not a variably displayed symbol is currently being displayed, even if the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize, such as when the effect content, including the variably displayed decorative symbol, momentarily disappears from the screen, or when movable bodies 32A and 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Based on receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

Display areas (special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) are provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. Note that in this embodiment, a special symbol pending memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first and second special symbols; however, a first special symbol pending memory display area that displays a first pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol pending memory display area that displays a second pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it changes between a closed and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 for playing and outputting sound effects, etc. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

Moveable bodies 32A and 32B that operate in response to the effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 1). Furthermore, movable body lamps 9d are provided on movable bodies 32A and 32B. These movable body lamps 9d, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Furthermore, these main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are constructed to include LEDs.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the player of the game progress or enhancing the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B, or by using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards on which electrical components are mounted to realize specific electrical functions.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. In addition, each layer is classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layers being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 3 images. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area where an image is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5, which is an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area with a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in which these images are drawn to display a first interface image at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first and second special pattern reserved memory counts, and a second interface image at the top left of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the top-level images on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) are set to have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle-level images on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) are set to have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom-level images on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals that operate the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or to the drive circuits that drive the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of movable bodies 32A and 32B (such as supplying signals to operate movable bodies 32A and 32B).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 3 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, as shown in Figure 3 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be selected if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

For example, as shown in FIG. 3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be a "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot C." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot."

Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the decorative symbol variation in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state). Furthermore, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, time-saving, probability variable state). Furthermore, the time-saving probability variable state may be simply referred to as the "probability variable state."

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 3 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to identify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the probability variable control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 4, on the main board 11, the following numerical data is controlled so that they can be counted: random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may also count numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot" as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative patterns, as one of several pre-prepared types, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 5 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table referenced to determine one of several types of jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state should be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," and "variable jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 6 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," and "Probable jackpot C," in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "Non-probable jackpot," in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed two times (so-called 2 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, "Probable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot, and "Probable jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable jackpot.

The probability variable control and time-saving control that begin after the jackpot gaming state of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C ends are terminated on the condition that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the jackpot gaming state of a non-probability variable jackpot ends is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed or that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state before the 100 variable displays are completed. Therefore, if a recurring jackpot is one of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C, probability variable control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without an intermediate normal state. In other words, the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6 (A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," "Probable jackpot C," and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." This setting allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type as a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined based on the first start condition being met to start a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition being met to start a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in special games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which results in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second start entry slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6 (A), the allocation of determination values for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As mentioned above, just as the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A," which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of a special game with a first special symbol may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." For example, in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, fewer judgment values may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" compared to a special game with a first special symbol. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special game with a first special symbol or a second special symbol, the jackpot type may be determined by referencing common table data.

Figure 7 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach," respectively, and to correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot." Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that in this embodiment, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach variation patterns include a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a miss; a variation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a miss; and a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits) and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 7, the special chart change time for the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that for the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to that determined type may be determined.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display being executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, if the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined 5% of the time, PB1-2 is determined 20% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 35% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 40% of the time.

Also, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot A to C, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined 10% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 20% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 70% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is one or less, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss variation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined 50% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 40% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is two, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 30% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is three, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 20% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability variable state), miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using this miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, miss fluctuation pattern determination table C determines PA1-3 80% of the time, PA2-1 10% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection rate of one of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, according to the game status, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern appropriate for the game status, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. Data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150, as shown in FIG. 9, which serves as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 002SG152, a game control timer setting unit 002SG153, a game control counter setting unit 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 002SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred, in order of winning.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151A associates the reserve number with the order of entry into the first start entry port (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 002SG190 as shown in Figure 10(A). The performance control data storage area 002SG190 shown in Figure 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A shown in Figure 10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A also has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of two commands, a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating these start win slot designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs, commands from the start win slot designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent sequentially. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 002SG194A shown in Figure 10(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in Figure 10(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 11, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

Also, if the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the working area by executing the clearing process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the results of the determination, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command thus transmitted and set for the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and processes for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the large prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (002SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (002SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the number of reserved memories for the first special chart in 002SGS102 is not the upper limit value (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 002SGS101 is off (002SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 002SGS102 has reached the upper limit (002SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (002SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 002SGS105 is not the upper limit (002SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 002SGS103 or 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data indicating each extracted random number value and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot," and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (002SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (002SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in Figure 12 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
Figure 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 13 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of second special symbol reserved memories is other than "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 002SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS142, the second special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 002SGS145). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol count counter and determines whether the read value is "0." In this way, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is determined to be "0" in step 002SGS141, and determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started before the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

When the number of reserved first special symbols stored in step 002SGS145 is other than "0" (step 002SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory unit corresponding to reserve number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS146, the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 5 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss." Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). Furthermore, in this step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, a "jackpot" is determined if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, which corresponds to the high probability state (high probability state), and a "miss" is determined if it does not fall within that range. Additionally, if the probability flag is off and the game is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 002SGS150, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different determination data (determination values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of a special chart game or the like begins is a high probability state. When the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is determined (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If step 002SGS150 determines that a jackpot has occurred (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 002SGS153). By referencing the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches one of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table: "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," or "variable jackpot C" (step 002SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in step 002SGS154, the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game state ends—either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state—is determined before the fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002SGS155). For example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0," if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, "0" if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, "2," and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, "3." After processing step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Also, if step 002SGS150 determines that the result is a "miss" (step 002SGS150; N), step 002SGS156 is executed without executing steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the determined result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "Probable Jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "Probable Jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 002SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 16. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 16 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B. Furthermore, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) is executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display process (step S80) is executed to display a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode, and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is normal, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is in a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is in a high-probability, high-base state. Furthermore, the first and second background images are switched when a switching display condition is met, such as when a variable display of SP Reach Hare is executed or when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance starts based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer times out without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
17 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the hold memory display (first hold display 002SG101 or second hold display 002SG102) in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, such as a shift display (described later). After the hold display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag stored in RAM 122.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." During this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable bodies 32A and 32B, output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to an instruction (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to an instruction (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5." In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0," and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 17. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol reserve memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is OFF in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is OFF (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined based on the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, if the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form a "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands corresponding to probability variable jackpot B to probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, decorative pattern combinations such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols form an even number as the stopping symbol.

Furthermore, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-variable jackpot, the stopping symbol may be determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (e.g., combinations of decorative symbols such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"), just as when the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands corresponding to variable jackpots B to C. In this case, by further sharing the effects during variable display during jackpot play and in the variable jackpot state, the player can be drawn to whether the game state is in the variable jackpot state or the time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and further, whether the time-saving state will end after 100 variable displays or continue until 10,000 variable displays, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a decorative pattern combination in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.

To determine these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number to determine the stopping symbols, and determine the stopping symbols of the decorative symbols using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach with pseudo-consecutive wins (fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) (step 002SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach, that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command for a super reach, the display colors of the stopped patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5C that form the reach state are identified from the data indicating the stopped decorative patterns determined in step 002SGS276 and stored in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo consecutive number of times display determination table shown in Figure 49 (C), the display color of the pseudo consecutive number of times display to be displayed when the first re-variable display is started, that is, the pseudo consecutive number of times display (e.g., "x2") indicating that two variable displays, including the first variable display, will be started in the variable display, is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279). If it is determined that it is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279; Y), the pseudo consecutive win count display determination table shown in Figure 49 (C) is used to determine and store the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display to be displayed when the second re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo consecutive win count display (e.g., "x3") indicating that three variable displays, including the first variable display, will begin in the variable display (step 002SGS280).

If step 002SGS279 determines that the variation pattern is not two pseudo consecutive wins, or if step 002SGS280 is executed, a start wait timer is set to start displaying the number of pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

In addition, the process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all of which are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative and small symbols to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative and small symbols. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, the decorative symbols and small symbols will be explained based on Figures 19 to 22. Figure 19 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbols and small symbols. Figure 20 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode. Figure 21 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, respectively. Figure 22 shows (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode, respectively, showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols. Figure 22 shows (E) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode, showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols.

In Figure 19, the sizes of the decorative symbols (for low base state), decorative symbols (for high base state), and small symbols are displayed at the ratio when displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S.

As shown in FIG. 19, the decorative symbols (for low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display unit 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base portion when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base portion; a character display unit 002SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display unit 002SG051; an information display unit 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base portion when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, in this embodiment, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base portion; and a roughly rectangular base display unit 002SG054 displayed surrounding the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, and information display unit 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various information other than the name (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

In addition, the decorative symbols (for high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 that is displayed surrounding the number display section 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts and the small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbol consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. Note that in this embodiment, the numbers on the decorative symbol and the numbers on the small symbol correspond, but not all of the numbers on both symbols necessarily correspond. For example, the numbers on the small symbol may be numbers "1" to "5," which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative symbol, or they may be symbols or figures that are different from the numbers on the decorative symbol.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns.

<Display time of each symbol> The decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) are almost always displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the image display device 5 is powered on, but they may be erased (not displayed), for example, when an SP reach effect (super reach effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, the small symbols are always displayed in front of the decorative symbols (higher layer) while the image display device 5 is powered on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative symbols are erased as described above. However, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small symbols (for example, an error message) is displayed.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> In the first presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for low base state) are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the second presentation mode, decorative symbols are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves curvedly from the back to the front across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the third presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation facing up and down, and in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols are displayed variably by scrolling in a linear fashion from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols are displayed variably in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, switching between symbols "0" to "9" (updating symbols).

In a broad sense, the above-mentioned "scrolling display" and "switching display" are both included in "switching display," in which images are switched between displays. However, as described below, a "scrolling display" may refer to an image that is framed in or faded in to the display area, and then framed out or faded out from the display area, thereby updating and displaying multiple images. A distinction may also be made between a "switching display" and an image that is updated and displayed by repeatedly displaying and hiding (erasing), or by rotating, at a predetermined position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

<Numeric display section> The decorative design (for low base state) and decorative design (for high base state) have not only numeric display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054, whereas the small design is composed only of a numeric display section.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and in the center decorative pattern display area 5C they are displayed in a size slightly smaller than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for high base state) are displayed in the same size in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each small pattern display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5, but the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is arranged slightly higher than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and is therefore arranged slightly higher than the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the high base state, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the high base state is arranged closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see Figure 20).

Furthermore, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as the standard, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small pattern is small. In other words, the size of the number display section increases in the order of decorative pattern (for high base state), decorative pattern (for low base state), and small pattern (size of number display section: decorative pattern (for high base state) > decorative pattern (for low base state) > small pattern). Furthermore, the overall size of each pattern is also in the same relationship as the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear larger, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to create a sense of depth and increase interest, while in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative patterns are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby increasing the degree to which the decorative patterns can be recognized (see Figure 20).

The decorative pattern (for low base state), decorative pattern (for high base state), and numerical display portion of the small pattern are each formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created using 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) using points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, information reproducing the material, etc. is assigned to each surface, and the object is reproduced by illuminating it from an arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.). However, it may also be an image that can be viewed in three dimensions when displayed on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from behind the image liquid crystal panel toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel located in front of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Furthermore, among the decorative symbols from "0" to "9," the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" are probability symbols corresponding to a "probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a high probability, high base state after the jackpot ends, while the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" are normal symbols (non-probability variable symbols) corresponding to a "non-probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low probability, high base state after the jackpot ends. Note that even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, the normal symbols may result in a predetermined jackpot combination.

<Character Display> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative symbol (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display section 002SG052 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display starts or stops, as described below. On the other hand, the decorative symbol (for high base state) and the small symbol do not have a character display section.

<Information Display Unit> The information display unit 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the information display unit 002SG053 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display unit 002SG053 also displays the "name," which is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, and as described below, the "name" is erased when the variable display begins. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have an information display unit.

<Base display section> The base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Furthermore, the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the base display section 002SG054 and the base display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, when the size of the base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is larger. On the other hand, no base display section is provided for the small pattern.

<Main Color> The color of the numbers displayed on the number display units 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. Furthermore, the number base units other than numbers, and base display units 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc., may be the same color as the numbers, or may be displayed in a different color than the numbers.

The characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original colors without being influenced by the main color. Furthermore, the character corresponding to the probability variation pattern is preferably an ally character, for example, when there are separate ally and enemy characters. Alternatively, it is preferable that the ally character be a central character in the story, such as the protagonist of the story or someone closely related to the protagonist.

As mentioned above, when the narrative concept of allies and enemies is applied, preview effects and SP reach effects are generally presented from the perspective of the allies, and if the SP reach effect is structured around allies fighting each other, the player will be notified that a favorable outcome for the allies (such as a jackpot) will occur if the outcome is favorable for the allies, such as the allies defeating the enemies.

Also, the main color with the highest occupancy rate across the entire area of each decorative symbol (for low base state) and decorative symbol (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. Also, while the color used for normal symbols consisting of even numbers is "blue" and the color used for special symbols consisting of odd numbers is "red," they may be different colors.

In addition, in high base states, as described below, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, so the decorative symbols (for low base states) need to be more visible and appealing than the decorative symbols (for low base states). Stop symbol announcements and announcements of when the variation will begin are often performed by incorporating effect displays into the decorative symbols. As a result, decorative symbols (for high base states) are primarily composed of the number display section 002SG061, and are characterized by a larger size ratio than decorative symbols (for low base states) which are composed of a character display section and a number display section.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the numbers in the decorative design (for the high base state) may be made more flashy in appearance, such as by having more complex movements or a more sophisticated design, than the numbers in the decorative design (for the low base state), in order to enhance the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, the colors are "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers, but they may be other colors. Also, numbers that are the same as decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

The design of the small symbols may be a reduced version of the material of the numbers in the decorative symbols in the low base state and high base state, but rather than enhancing the presentation effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers in the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with a simple color that is not glossy, etc.) in order to improve visibility for players.

As shown in FIG. 20, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (B1) (B2)), the third presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (C1) (C2)), and the fourth presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (D1) (D2)). The first and second presentation modes are presentation modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in Figure 20 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background image 002SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 20 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 21 (A1) and (A2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeatedly updating the display from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby scrolling the display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, and small symbols, while the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 002SG101 and second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, small symbols, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all presentation modes, and therefore will not be described below.

As shown in Figure 20 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 002SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 20 (B2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (second scrolling display) that moves in a curved pattern from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 21 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side. The center decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back of the screen in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, moving toward the front, and then displayed frame-out.

Furthermore, when a leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "2" decorative symbol) displayed in frame passes the stop position of the decorative symbol set in the vertical center of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, a trailing decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) is displayed in frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), while the leading "2" decorative symbol passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "3" decorative symbol are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative symbol passes the stop position, the trailing "3" decorative symbol and the "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number from "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and the display is updated repeatedly from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 20 (C1), in the third presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 002SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 20 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation pointing in the vertical direction.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 22 (C1) and (C2), the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode have a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a, and the preceding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "4") is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, because the base display unit 002SG064 has low transmittance (is opaque), the decorative symbol displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative symbol).

The decorative symbols are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from first surface 5a to second surface 5b, then first surface 5a to second surface 5b, etc., the numbers increase in the order "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying numbers from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 (C2), when the first surface 5a is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the second surface 5b is displayed, the second surface 5b displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "3") displayed on the first surface 5a. Next, although not specifically shown, when the second surface 5b is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the first surface 5a is displayed, the first surface 5a displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and a time-saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 20 (D1), in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 20 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 22 (D1) and (D2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 22 (D1), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, as shown in FIG. 22 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby scrolling the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

In addition, in the second presentation mode, the name in the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative symbol is always hidden, even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth presentation modes, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first presentation mode, displaying the information display section 002SG053 draws attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character. Meanwhile, in the second and third presentation modes, keeping the information display section 002SG053 hidden allows players to focus more on the variable display and preview presentations rather than the character. Note that not only the name displayed in the information display section 002SG053, but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in Figure 22 (E), the decorative symbols and small symbols have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed, one decorative symbol is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and takes a passing period Ta2 before it is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge. In other words, it takes a period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display is finished. On the other hand, during the period Ta2, the small symbols of a losing combination are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

In more detail, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (30 frames of images displayed per second), 10 frames of images will be displayed from the start of displaying one decorative pattern to the end of that display, and this period Ta2 will be approximately 0.3 seconds.

Meanwhile, the small symbols of different losing combinations (for example, "635," "175," "461," "532," "913," etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display ends, the small symbols of losing combinations are switched five times, each displayed for period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Note that although the small symbols of each losing combination are displayed for period Ta1, this is only for a moment (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to see visually.

Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326") based on the determination that the display result of the variable display will be a losing display result, then after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and before stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"), it switches the display so that the small pattern of the losing combination, "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. This prevents the small pattern of the losing combination from revealing in advance that the decorative pattern of the losing combination will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are scrolled in the first, second, and fourth presentation modes, or rotated in the third presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed variably at a constant speed from the start to the end of the variable display.

(Various decorative actions)
Next, various action displays of decorative symbols will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 shows (A) a decorative symbol variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in Figures 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state move within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to provide a variable display. However, apart from this variable display movement, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the number display portion 002SG051 and character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative symbol.

(Change start action)
As shown in FIG. 23A , when variable display is initiated in the first and second presentation modes, a “variation start action” is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 flips its body orientation from left to right. Specifically, in the variation start action A1, the character is in a normal position facing diagonally forward to the right with both hands on their hips; in the variation start action A2, the character is in a position facing forward with both hands raised and spread; and in the variation start action A3, the character is in a position facing diagonally forward to the left with both hands on their hips. For the sake of convenience, only the states of three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are shown here; however, in reality, the character is displayed over several dozen frames within the variation start action period (A1-A3), and a variation start action (movement) is executed in which the character’s body orientation changes in the order of diagonally forward to the right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward to the left (A3).

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward and left, the decorative symbol moves (rises) a predetermined distance from its stopped position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then begins to move downward, thereby starting the scrolling display. These change start actions A1 to A4 are executed over a change start action period Tb1 (see Figure 24), from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbol (the downward movement of the decorative symbol).

For ease of explanation, only four frames of the change start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown here, but in reality, the change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's movements over several dozen frames during the change start action period Tb1, which is until the character's body orientation is reversed.

In this embodiment, the variation start action is exemplified as one in which the character's body orientation is reversed left and right, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation start action can be changed to other actions, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving their body. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern takes action. In other words, the variation start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern begins to scroll or rotate, and is an action that transitions during scrolling, i.e., a separate action that operates in a manner different from scrolling.

In addition, in the first presentation mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character name (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character name is easy to see when it is displayed statically, but once the scrolling display begins, the character name is hidden, drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. The character's name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after it is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display begins, attention can be drawn to the variable display and preview effects rather than the name.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display of special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period may be the period from when the conditions for starting the variable display are met until the variable display of decorative symbols begins, that is, the period from when a starting winning occurs or when variable display based on reserved memory begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins.

(Fluctuation stop action)
As shown in Figure 23 (B), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed), a "variable stop action" is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from its normal state, with hands on hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (variation stop action B1), to an enlarged state that extends farther above the base display unit 002SG054 than the normal state (variation stop action B2), and then is reduced in size and restored to its normal state (variation stop action B3).

For ease of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here, but in reality, the fluctuation stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character in motion over several dozen frames during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it is restored.

In this embodiment, an example of a variation stop action is shown in which a character is enlarged, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation stop action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving its body. Furthermore, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern may also take action. In other words, a variation stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change, such as scrolling or rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 23 (C), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed until it is displayed in a stopped state (pattern confirmed)), the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 in the decorative pattern repeatedly shrinks and restores, and a "loop action" is executed in which the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around an axis of rotation facing up and down.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character places both hands on their hips and faces diagonally forward to the right, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; in loop action C2, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right; in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; and in loop action C4, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in order over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action returns to C1, and loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. In other words, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are executed cyclically.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of loop action C1 to C4 are shown here, but in reality, the character is displayed in a reduced size and then restored, and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates and restores during loop action period Tb3, during which the character and numeric display unit 002SG051 are displayed over several dozen frames, resulting in a loop action (movement).

In this embodiment, the loop action is exemplified by a form in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display unit 002SG051 rotates, but the present invention is not limited to this. The loop action can be changed to other forms, such as a change in the character's hair or facial expression, or body movement. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, undergoes an action. In other words, a loop action is an action that is executed from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a stopped position until it is displayed as a stopped pattern (pattern confirmation), and is a separate action from the action that changes during scrolling.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative symbols and the light emission control of lamps will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 (A) is a diagram comparing the various actions of decorative symbols and the periods of light emission control of lamps, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of lamps.

As shown in Figure 24(A), the decorative pattern change start actions A1 to A4 (see Figure 23(A)) have an execution period, or change start action period Tb1, of approximately 1.5 seconds (change start action period Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds), and consist of approximately 45 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative pattern change stop actions B1 to B3 (see Figure 23(B)) have an execution period, or change stop action period Tb2, of approximately 0.8 seconds (change stop action period Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 28 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative pattern loop actions C1 to C4 (see Figure 23(C)) have a loop action period Tb3, which is one cycle, of approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 55 frames of images.

Also, as shown in FIG. 24(B), the movable body lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, as well as the main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, emit light based on loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is in a low base state.

This loop light emission control, for example, emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" over one cycle of loop light emission period Tb4, then returns to "white" after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, and then emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" again during loop light emission period Tb4, and this is repeated cyclically. In other words, with loop light emission control, light emissions of "white," "blue," and "yellow" are executed cyclically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in a low base state, the loop action is repeated to encourage the player to use the variable display of decorative symbols, while in a high base state, where variable display is more easily performed than in a low base state, excessive encouragement of variable display, which could be annoying, is prevented. Furthermore, because the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative symbols can be made to stand out in an appropriate way.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted cyclically, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted in this order, followed by "yellow," "white," and "blue" in this order may be cyclically emitted, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be cyclically emitted.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in Figure 24 (A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode. Furthermore, the loop lighting control of the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in Figure 24 (B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be described with reference to Fig. 25. In Fig. 25, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in Figure 25 (A1), when waiting to play (number of reserved memories "0"), no reserved display is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. The special reserved memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, with the first display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in Figure 25 (A2), when a start win (e.g., the first start win) occurs while waiting to play, the first hold display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U. Next, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 25 (A3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc toward the active display area 5F, and when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 25 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 25 (A2), when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but when the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 25 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to active display 002SG103. In other words, the shift display has not ended. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins before the shift display has ended, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

As a result, the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not begin until the reserved shift display period ends, during which it is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103.Then, the aforementioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 25 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being displayed variably and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in FIG. 25 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 has been erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun, as shown below. In this way, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of one variable display and the start of the next, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the presentation. Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display has been erased, and the display of a new active display 002SG103 allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has begun.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 25 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic curve toward the active display area 5F, and by moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 25 (B4)).

In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally to the left (see Figure 25 (B3)) in conjunction with the movement of the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left, and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 25 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 25 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon completion of the variable display, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has not yet moved to the active display area 5F, as shown in Figure 25 (B3). However, at the point when the moving display of the first pending display 002SG101 begins, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 25 (B4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not yet finished moving (shifting display) to the active display area 5F. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins in this state, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, until the end of the hold shift display period in which the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned change start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the hold shift display period ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are configured in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes, so the shift display shown in FIG. 25 is executed in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes. However, for example, if a special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each presentation mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each presentation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 25, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in an operating mode (for example, a mode in which the hold display moves in a curved trajectory from the special chart hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) that is common to multiple types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns, etc.), but it may also be possible to execute shift displays of multiple types of operating modes corresponding to each variation pattern and each presentation mode. It may also be possible to execute shift displays that operate in different modes depending on whether the game state is in a low base state or a high base state.

Furthermore, operating modes common to multiple types of variation patterns in shift display include those in which at least one of multiple elements, such as the display mode, display speed, and shift display period until the pending display is switched to the active display, is common.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and then the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is moved (shifted) from the special symbol hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of hold memories is "0", when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, a switching display (shift display) that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is exemplified, in which the first pending display 002SG101 moves non-linearly (e.g., in a mountain-like manner) from the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the display may move linearly to the left. Furthermore, the switching display (shift display) is not limited to sliding the pending display, but may also temporarily erase the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and begin displaying the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to Figs. 26 to 35. Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first presentation mode. Fig. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 26. Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second presentation mode. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 28. Fig. 30 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in Fig. 28. Fig. 31 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. Fig. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 31. Fig. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third presentation mode. Fig. 34 is a diagram for explaining how decorative symbols appear. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode.

Note that in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not represent images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG.

Figure 26 (A) shows the state in which, in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 26 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 26 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 23 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 26(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 26(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 26(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 26 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 26 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the upward action A4 begins, and when the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 26 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 26 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 26 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 26 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 26 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the image transmittance (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 26(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 26(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 27(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the central decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of variable display operation in the second presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the second presentation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

Figure 28 (A) shows the state in which, in the second presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, in the second presentation mode, the name in the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 28 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed as a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 28 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 23 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 28(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 28(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 28(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 28 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 28 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the retreating action A4 begins, and when the retreating movement (action A4) to the back of the display screen ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 28 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 28 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 28 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 28 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 28 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the image transmittance (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 28(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 28(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 29(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display in the second presentation mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the back of the screen to the front. Specifically, as shown in Figures 30(A) and (B), the scrolling display is configured to cause the decorative symbols to move in a curved manner from the back to the front. Therefore, between the time a decorative symbol is displayed in frame-in mode in decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R and the time it is displayed out of frame, another decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "3") that is positioned so that it partially overlaps with one decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "2") may be visible through decorative symbol "2." At this time, the character in character display section 002SG052 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 30 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind the first decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "3" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" do not overlap, preventing the decorative pattern "2" located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 30(A), from the time the decorative symbols are displayed in frame-in mode in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until they are displayed out of frame mode as shown in Figure 30(C), they move and disappear while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative symbols are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so they move from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency) as they fade out in accordance with the display speed. Therefore, from the time the scrolling display starts until the high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 30(A) to 30(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative symbols even at the back of the screen.

(Example of operation of variable display as modified example 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to Figures 31 and 32. In Modification 1, the decorative symbols are displayed scrolling in a curved manner as in the second presentation mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side.

The flow in Figures 31(A) to 31(D) is similar to that in Figures 28(A) to 28(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in Figure 31 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and backward action A4 begins, and when the forward movement (action A4) toward the front of the display screen ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 31 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 31 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 31 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 31 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 31 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

In addition, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 31(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 31(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 32(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 31(G) to 32(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, with a fade-out display in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display of variant 1 is designed to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the front to the back of the screen. Specifically, as shown in Figures 31 (G) and (H), the scrolling display is designed to cause the decorative symbols to move in a curved manner from the front to the back. Therefore, between the time a decorative symbol is framed in and displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time it is framed out, another decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "2") positioned so that it partially overlaps the decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "3") may become visible through the decorative symbol "3." In this case, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of decorative symbol "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 is difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind the first decorative pattern "3" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "3". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "2" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "3" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" do not overlap and are prevented from making the decorative pattern "3" located in the foreground difficult to see.

In addition, in this variant 1, the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then disappear as they move while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative patterns are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so they are moved from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency) as they fade out in accordance with the display speed. Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 31(F) to 31(H). However, after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative patterns even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 33 and 34.

Figure 33 (A) shows the state in which, in the third presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were rotating in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 33 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 33 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 23 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 33(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 33(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 33(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 33 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 33 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate. In the high base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, the rotating display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 33(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 33(G), before reaching high speed as shown in Figure 33(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As shown in Figure 34, the rotating display in the third presentation mode rotates the decorative symbols to repeatedly display them on the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b. The decorative symbols are semi-transparent during the rotating display and become opaque when the rotating display stops. During the rotating display, the number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a of the decorative symbols, which are semi-transparent, is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 34 (A), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a slow speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transparency is the first transparency, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a can be seen, but the number "437" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the first surface 5a, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (C), when the decorative patterns are displayed in a semi-transparent state where they are rotated at high speed and have a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are such that the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult to see, but is still visible, while the number "874" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse, second surface 5b is difficult to see. Furthermore, both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during the high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, making it possible to see not only the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b). However, since the numbers on the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) are displayed while the numbers on the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) are not, the numbers on the front and back sides of the decorative pattern do not overlap, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, even when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable display mode in the high base state, a loop illumination control (see Figure 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern may be used to repeatedly illuminate the white, blue, and yellow light patterns. This simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the fourth presentation mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 35 (A) shows the state in which, in the fourth presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily displayed at their respective stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 23 (A))

Next, as shown in Figure 35 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 35 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 23 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 35(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 35(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 35(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 35 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 35 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed where the transmittance reaches nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 35(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 35(G), before reaching high speed as shown in Figure 35(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display has ended, switching the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during the performance control process in step S76, and can perform a common shift display when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).As a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, an example has been given in which the performance control CPU 120 does not perform an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

Furthermore, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be executed when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).Since a common shift display is executed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 42 and 43, an example is given in which, when the variable display of a special symbol begins, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center begins when the shift display begins, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin when the shift display is being performed.

(Example of operation of each part when a symbol stops displaying)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when a pattern stops will be explained based on Fig. 36 to Fig. 40. Fig. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns following Fig. 36. Fig. 38 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 39 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "2 or less"])
First, an example of the operation of each part when a decorative symbol is displayed in a static display based on a miss variable pattern when the number of reserved memories is two or less in the first presentation mode will be explained with reference to Figures 36 and 37. Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 36 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop is approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 36 (B)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 36 (C)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 36 (D)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 23 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 36 (E)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 36 (F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 36 (F)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 36 (G)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 36 (H)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 23 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 37 (I)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 37(J), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 37(K)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 37(K)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 37(L)), after which a variable stop action (see Figure 23(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 37(M)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 37 (M)).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "3"])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 3 in the first presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 38(A) to 38(G). Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 38 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop is approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 38 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 38 (C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 23 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 38 (D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 36 (E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 23 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 38 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 38 (G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 23 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 38 (G)).

(Example of the stop display of symbols in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display in the fourth presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 39(A) and 39(B). Note that the third presentation mode is almost the same as the fourth presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 39 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, which were being displayed at high speed, simultaneously slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 39 (B)).

The left, center, and right decorative symbols are then simultaneously displayed in a temporary stop at the stop positions of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transparency of the decorative symbols becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 23 (B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) after the temporary stop display is not executed either.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as static symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as static symbols, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 39 (C)).

In this way, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on an abbreviated variable pattern is executed), the variable stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped, enhancing interest. On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is three in a low base state, or when a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, and a variable display based on abbreviated variable patterns is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variable stop action is not executed, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size, allowing it to be stopped without impairing its visibility.

In this embodiment, the animation (moving image) data of the various movements of the decorative patterns can be created by combining materials for each period, such as: 1. From the start of the variable display to just before the high-speed variable display, 2. High-speed variable display, 3. Slow-speed variable display to stop of the variable display, 4. Stopped pattern. However, with regard to 2. High-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent, and while it is possible to see how they are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, it is extremely difficult to visually determine which decorative patterns have passed by (indicated by arrows in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, even if there is high-speed variable display animation data for each type of decorative pattern (a type that corresponds to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), it would not be very meaningful and would only take up space in ROM 121, so it is preferable that common data be used for the high-speed variable display animation data regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Background change example)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to Figures 40 and 41. In Figure 40, (A1) shows the first background image, (A2) shows the first predetermined background image, and (B) shows the background change. Figure 41 shows the flow of background change in the first presentation mode.

As shown in Figure 40, in the first presentation mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40 (A1)), which shows a daytime cityscape seen from afar, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40 (A2)), which shows a daytime cityscape. The background image is switched when a predetermined switching condition is met (for example, when an SP reach miss occurs). In this embodiment, the background image is switched at a predetermined timing in the variable display following an SP reach miss (for example, when the variable display starts).

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the first presentation mode switches between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not specifically shown, it may be possible to selectively switch between three or more types of background images, including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. Furthermore, the fulfillment of the switching conditions is not limited to the above, and may also be fulfilled when a specific presentation other than SP Reach is executed, when a single background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time, or when a selection is made by the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative symbols reach a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 40(B), when switching from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or from first predetermined background image 002SG081A to first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081, which is displayed at 100% opacity, is gradually increased until it disappears, while a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden at 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a cross-fade display is executed in which the fade-out display period A1 of first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of image are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 41(A), the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 increases over time, making it more difficult to see (see Figure 41(B)), while the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is displayed in a layer below the first background image 002SG081, decreases, gradually becoming more visible (see Figure 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further, while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see Figures 41(D) and (E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 reaches 100% and is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A reaches 0%, making it easily visible (see Figure 41(F)).

In the present embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are the same duration. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance when the background image is faded out or faded in is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate. For example, the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in a first period, and then increase or decrease rapidly in a second period.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the background image is switched and displayed in one presentation mode (for example, the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode), the present invention is not limited to this and can also be applied to a form in which the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and to a form in which the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 42 to 45. Fig. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first presentation mode. Fig. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second presentation mode. Fig. 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. Fig. 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first presentation mode, (B) the second presentation mode, and (C) the third and fourth presentation modes.

(First presentation mode)
As shown in Figure 42, in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45 (A)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out, is longer than the fade-out display period A21, which is the period from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin to be displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is longer than the fade-in display period B21, which is the period from when the display speed of the scrolling decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts to slow down until they are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 24 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second presentation mode)
Next, as shown in Figure 43, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45 (B)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling display begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-out display, the more abrupt the impression of disappearance. Therefore, for fade-out displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns and the background change (for example, at the start of the variable display), the fade-out display of the decorative patterns is performed in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-in display, the more abrupt the impression it gives, for fade-in displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change (for example, when the variable display is stopped), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22; see Figures 45 (A) and (B)). By doing this, not only does the scroll display of the decorative pattern differ in the second presentation mode compared to the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scrolling display until the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see as the display speed increases is longer, allowing the decorative pattern to be noticed for a longer period of time.

In this embodiment, as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the second presentation mode, a second scroll display that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front has been exemplified as a special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display that moves in a linear manner from top to bottom in the first presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display is not limited to the above-mentioned one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front, but may also be a variety of scroll displays, such as one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the front to the back, as described in Variation 1 above, or a scroll display that moves in a linear or curved manner from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 are different when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. By doing this, the fade-out display period is the same despite the different presentation modes, making it difficult for the player to predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is different from the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed. In other words, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and first background image 002SG081 would disappear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Therefore, by erasing the decorative pattern first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is different from the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. In other words, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A would appear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 24 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Figure 44, in the third and fourth presentation modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol starts, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating or scrolling all at once without any action to start the variation. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45 (C)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually slow down in unison and are displayed at a slower speed, and their transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable display ends as is, and the decorative symbols are displayed statically along with the small symbols, without any variable stop action or loop action as in the first and second presentation modes. After that, a symbol determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the third presentation mode or a scrolling display is performed in the fourth presentation mode, and the fade-out display period A22 when a scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45 (A) to (C)).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b emit light in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music based on light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. In addition, the high-bass music is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are exemplified as being illuminated in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high base music based on illumination control corresponding to the high base music pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, an illumination pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in order based on loop illumination control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24 (B)), and background BGM may be output from speakers 8L and 8R. This simplifies the illumination control of the performance control CPU 120.

(Example of customer waiting demo performance)
Next, the customer waiting demo effect will be described with reference to Figures 46 and 47. Figure 46 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo effect. Figure 47 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a start winning occurs during the customer waiting demo effect.

As shown in Figure 46, the "waiting for customers demo effect" is an effect that notifies the player that they are in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is initiated by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the reception of the waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without the reception of a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not specifically shown, when the power is turned on, initial operations of movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. are performed in the initial operation control process, and then menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 46 (A)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on without any variable display, menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is no longer displayed, customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see Figure 46 (B)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see Figures 46(B)-(E)), an image of a group of ally characters remains displayed (see Figure 46(F)), while the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises back to the origin position (see Figures 46(G)-(H)), and the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, ending the performance (see Figure 46(I)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, a menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 46(J)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed repeatedly multiple times in the standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times. The performance format of the customer waiting demo performance as a standby effect is optional and can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the customer waiting demo effect (see Figures 46 (B) to (H)), small symbols are continuously displayed in a static state in the display area 5S, while decorative symbols are hidden in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, by displaying small symbols even when decorative symbols are hidden, the player is made aware that the variable display is in a static state.

We will explain an example of what happens when a starting win occurs while this kind of customer waiting demo effect is being performed.

As shown in Figure 47 (A), if the first start winning occurs (the conditions for starting the variable display are met) while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of small symbols will begin in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is displayed, as shown in Figure 47 (B).

Next, as shown in Figure 47 (C), the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative symbols are displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F are also displayed, and the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Then, the first reserved display 002SG101 begins to move (shift) from the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to change in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 47 (D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in Figure 47 (E), the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R move upward in sequence, ending the change start action and starting the scrolling display (see Figure 47 (F)).

In this way, if a start win occurs while the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of small symbols begins before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode), after which the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display begins.

In other words, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is still displayed, it will be difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the small symbols, switching from the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scrolling display after the shift display of the pending display has ended, the player can be made to recognize that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scrolling display begins after the shift display has ended, there will be a large time lag between the occurrence of the first start winning and the start of the scrolling display. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols will begin before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, ensuring a display that corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 46(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if the first or second performance mode is selected, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is executed, and loop lighting control (see Figure 24(B)) is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. On the other hand, if the third or fourth performance mode is selected, the loop action (see Figure 23(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is not executed, and lighting control is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music.

In this way, in a low base state, the decorative symbol loop action is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, drawing attention to the decorative symbol, thereby encouraging the variable display of the decorative symbol, and thus encouraging the player to resume playing. Meanwhile, in a high base state, neither the decorative symbol loop action nor the loop light emission control is executed, drawing attention to the fact that a high base effect (third or fourth effect mode) is being performed. The decorative symbol loop action does not need to be executed in the first or second effect mode, and the decorative symbol loop action may be executed in the third or fourth effect mode.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state because it is unlikely that a player will end play in the high base state, and it is more likely that they will simply leave their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an inoperable state without a variable display, and appealing with the loop action prevents other players from accidentally sitting down.

In addition, the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses solely on "movement," but for example, the decorative pattern does not change position, sway, or deform, but may instead remain stationary while a highlight moves across the decorative pattern, creating a sparkling animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and effect images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high base state may be animated in time with the high base music, or by moving the background images at a predetermined speed. In this case, as described above, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed, but the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo consecutive announcement)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive win notification will be described with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo consecutive win notification. Figure 49 shows (A) an example of the pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table.

As shown in Figure 48, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that teases whether the decorative symbols will be temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the display result being derived and displayed, and then the variable display will resume, in other words, whether a single variable display will be made to appear as multiple variable displays.

As shown in Figure 49 (A), the pseudo consecutive prediction can be implemented in two ways: a "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" in which the initial variable display and one re-variable display result in a total of 2 variable display times, and a "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" in which the initial variable display and two re-variable displays result in a total of 3 variable display times. If the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 1) variable display pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" is executed, and if the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 2) variable display pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" is executed. Note that the probability of winning is higher with the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" than with the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern."

Specifically, as shown in Figure 48 (A), when a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive prediction is initiated, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display was initiated. Next, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, entering a reach state (see Figure 48 (B)), and then a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 48 (C)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48(D)), and a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" is displayed above the center decorative symbol display area 5C, indicating that the first re-variable display will begin, i.e., the second variable display will begin (see FIG. 48(F)), and variable display of decorative symbols will resume in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, center decorative symbol display area 5C, and right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 48(G)). Note that in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive symbol passes the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, and decorative symbols with a number one larger than the temporarily displayed decorative symbol are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see FIG. 48(E)).

After the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 48 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-consecutive one-time pattern," after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol (see Figure 48 (L)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 48 (M)), and the performance develops into an SP reach effect.

Furthermore, after the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 48 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-double-consecutive pattern," a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and then a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, thereby returning to a reach state, after which a pseudo-consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48 (H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 48 (I)), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213, which reads "x3," is displayed above the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the second re-variable display will begin, i.e., the third variable display will begin (see Figure 48 (J)). After that, the variable display of the decorative patterns resumes in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 48 (K)).

After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 48 (L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 48 (M)), and the SP reach performance develops.

The pseudo consecutive announcement includes an introductory part that teases whether or not the variable display will resume (see Figures 48 (A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), (L)), and a result announcement part that notifies the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed (see Figures 48 (D)-(F), (H), (I), (M)).

As shown in Figure 49 (B1), during the pseudo consecutive win preview, when the variable display resumes after the pseudo consecutive win decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive win count display is displayed that indicates the number of times the variable display has resumed. Specifically, a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 (see Figures 48 (F) (G)) of "x2" is displayed, indicating that the first variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the second variable win display will begin, and a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 (see Figures 48 (J) (K)) of "x3" is displayed, indicating that the second variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the third variable win display will begin.

The pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 49 (B1) and the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 49 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes displayed in red. Also, as explained in FIG. 19, even-numbered regular symbols are displayed in blue, and odd-numbered special symbols are displayed in red. The display color of this pseudo consecutive win count display is determined using the pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table shown in FIG. 49 (C) in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 of the variable display count setting process explained in FIG. 18.

Specifically, when determining the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, if the variable display result is a "probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo consecutive win count display color is red/symbol color is red and pseudo consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined 10% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are blue/symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are red) is determined 90% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "non-probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined 30% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined 70% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo-consecutive number display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo-consecutive number display color is blue) is determined 90% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are red) is determined 10% of the time.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive win prediction, there are cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a first combination of different colors, and cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a second combination of the same color, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed with the second combination than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive win prediction.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 49 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number and display color, blue, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number but a different display color, red.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the third combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, blue, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 are different, both in color and red.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss and the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-same color, red, will be determined.

If the variable display result is a jackpot, and a probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, red, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different in color, blue.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the second combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display color is different, blue.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and a normal pattern ("3", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run will be lower than the probability that a non-identical color, red, will be determined.

In this way, the pseudo consecutive prediction can result in a first combination in which the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are different, or a second combination in which both the numbers and display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are the same type. This means that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination during the pseudo consecutive prediction. This allows players to focus not only on whether or not the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, but also, if executed, on the combination of the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutive wins is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive win is determined. Therefore, by making it more likely that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the second pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination than when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the first pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination, it is possible to draw more attention to the number of pseudo consecutive wins and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display.

Furthermore, if the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive number display during the second pseudo-consecutive match are both of the same type of second combination, the decorative symbol will become a probability variable symbol, so the probability of being controlled to a probability variable jackpot gaming state may be higher if a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo-consecutive matches is determined as the fluctuation pattern than if a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-consecutive match is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display is determined from among multiple colors depending on the number of decorative symbols temporarily displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display may be a display color that is predetermined for each pseudo-consecutive win count.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display format of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 is exemplified as "x2" or "x3", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive number display can be changed to various formats as long as the number of pseudo consecutive numbers can be specified. For example, it can be displayed in various formats such as "nth consecutive number" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time", "nth re-variation", etc.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo-consecutive prediction, the numbers on the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display are the same type and color in two cases: when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG213 (x3, red). However, other patterns are also possible, such as when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("4", green) and the pseudo-consecutive count display (x4, green). The color of the numbers on the decorative symbol, the color of the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display, and the number of pseudo-consecutive times can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, a decision is made as to whether or not the pseudo consecutive win count display color will be the same color as the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed, and the expectation level is higher if the same color is decided than if a different color is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, the pseudo consecutive win count display color may not be decided, but may be uniformly decided to be a predetermined display color (for example, white, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, entering a reach state, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting a re-variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo consecutive decorative symbol can be changed in various ways. Furthermore, after a decorative symbol with a different number than the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the re-variable display may also be started by a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L or the right decorative symbol display area 5R, or a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol, being temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

The decorative symbols provisionally displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo consecutive prediction do not necessarily have to be the same as the final decorative symbols that are displayed when the variable display ends. For example, after a regular symbol is provisionally displayed during the first pseudo consecutive, a special symbol may be displayed during the second pseudo consecutive, i.e., a symbol different from the symbol displayed during the first pseudo consecutive. Furthermore, the number of pseudo consecutive times is not limited to two, and three or more pseudo consecutive times (re-variable display) may be possible.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 50 to 52. Figure 50 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect. Figure 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect following Figure 50. Figure 52 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach effect. Note that, although an example of the operation of the reach effect in the first effect mode will be described below, similar reach effects may also be executable in the second to fourth effect modes.

As shown in Figure 50(A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variable pattern or a super reach variable pattern is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display began (see Figure 50(B)). Next, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach effect begins (see Figure 50(C)). At this time, decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the movable body lamps 9d of movable bodies 32A and 32B are illuminated based on the loop light emission control described above (see Figure 24(B)).

Note that Figures 50(B) and (C) illustrate a form in which the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and then the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and decorative symbols may be temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R simultaneously.

As shown in Figure 50 (D), when the reach effect begins, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the reach line suggestion image, reach line effect display 002SG250, is displayed superimposed on the decorative symbol (which is nearly transparent and invisible) currently being variably displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting the reach line suggestion effect. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at the stop positions in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and is a display that suggests that the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C will be displayed stationary on the reach line.

In Figure 50 (D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and right decorative symbol display area 5R are not just enlarged as in the variable stop action described above, but rather the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054 that form the decorative symbol are all enlarged at the same ratio. In this way, by enlarging the display in a manner different from when the variable display is stopped, it can be recognized that the variable display has not stopped, but has entered a reach mode.

As shown in Figure 50(D), when the reach performance begins, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed small near the stop position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, superimposed on the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and then gradually extends linearly toward the stop positions (left and right) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see Figure 50(E)). After reaching the left and right edges of the display screen (see Figure 50(F)), the display changes so that the vertical dimensions expand (see Figure 50(G)), and the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases through a fade-out display (see Figure 50(H)), and is finally erased and no longer displayed (see Figure 51(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50 (F), in the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarge the display), and when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off, making the periphery of the display screen darker than usual, thereby making the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out more.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50(D), after the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative pattern begins to move to the left and the right decorative pattern begins to move to the right, i.e., in directions away from each other (see Figure 50(E)). They also rotate a predetermined angle around a rotation axis facing up and down while moving away from each other (see Figure 50(F)), and when they reach the furthest position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotational display ends and they are temporarily displayed (see Figure 50(G)).

Then, as shown in Figure 50 (H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed enlarged in the separated positions on the left and right are reduced in size and rotated while moving from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 51 (I), when the decorative symbols are restored to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and no longer displayed, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C gradually decrease in scroll display speed and transmittance (transparency) as they fade in (see Figures 51 (J) to (K)), until the transmittance of the decorative symbols finally becomes 0% (opaque) and they are scrolled at a slow speed (see Figure 51 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 52, when executing a reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a separating display that separates the decorative symbols after executing the enlarged display.The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separating display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1), allowing the player to recognize the decorative symbols that form the reach state.

Furthermore, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative symbol is restored to its original state (td2<tf1), so the player can be made aware of the decorative symbol that forms the reach state, and when restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimension of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which focuses attention on which decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, narrows, making it difficult to see the variable display of the decorative patterns. Therefore, by performing a moving display that separates the left and right decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns that have reached a reach state are highlighted by the enlarged display, and then attention is quickly drawn to the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Furthermore, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified as being displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be displayed at the same time as the reach state is reached.

In addition, the movable body lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and the lamp may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Furthermore, instead of being turned off, the lamp may be made less bright than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body lamp 9d built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B located above and below the image display device 5 is used as the specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The specific light-emitting means is not limited to lamps located on movable bodies that can operate as described above, as long as they are located around the image display device 5. For example, it may be multiple board-side lamps, including an attacca lamp 9c, located on the gaming board, or a main lamp 9a or frame lamp 9b located on the gaming machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is located near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, turning it off can make the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out.

Furthermore, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2, which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 was executed, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, so that the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the transparency of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display) after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 almost simultaneously when it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, or the reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed after it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of operation of the SP reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 53 to 55. Figure 53 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect. Figure 54 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect following Figure 53. Figure 55 is a diagram showing an example of operation of each part in the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after the Reach state described in FIG. 50(C) is reached, the Reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP Reach effect is displayed, thereby announcing the Reach title, and an SP Reach effect (e.g., a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot (see FIGS. 53(B) and (C)). In the SP Reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 depicting space corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed, which is an image different from the first background image 002SG081 and second background image 002SG082, which are normal background images. Note that the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with a different appearance depending on the type of SP Reach effect.

Next, from the time the battle is decided until the specified valid operation period has elapsed, an operation prompt display 002SG071 consisting of the text "PRESS!!" encouraging the operation of the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072 imitating the push button 31B are displayed (see Figure 53 (D)).

When operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and button display 002SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color, the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 002SG073 highlighting the movable body 32B is displayed, and a specified effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state (see Figure 53 (E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, and the combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily (see Figure 53 (F)).

As shown in Figure 53 (G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is displayed temporarily. After that, a character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device, frames in from the bottom right side of the display screen, and then runs to the left, igniting the number display portions 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 53 (H)).

As shown in Figure 55(A), specific image 002SG075, which depicts a flame displayed by igniting a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051, as shown in Figures 55(B)-(D). Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 55(D), the flame image that constitutes specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop with three different images (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C), giving the appearance of a flickering flame. Finally, specific image 002SG075 disappears, the small symbols and decorative symbols are statically displayed, and the jackpot result is derived and displayed (see Figure 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 53 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach presentation is displayed as the background image in the notification presentation, a miss confirmed pattern combination (e.g., "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 53 (L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 53 (M), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed temporarily without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the losing result is derived and displayed (see Figure 53 (N)).

Furthermore, in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification effect is produced to notify players that they have been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 53 (E)), a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed in a provisionally stopped state (see Figure 54 (O)).

As shown in Figure 54 (P), upon completion of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the jackpot confirmation symbol combination (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 54 (Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 53 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a miss confirmed pattern combination (for example, "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 54 (R)).

Then, as shown in Figure 54 (S), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the losing display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 54 (T)).

In this way, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative symbol that is displayed after the notification effect has ended, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and creating excitement (see Figures 53 (H) and (I)). However, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative symbol that is displayed after the notification effect has ended (see Figure 54 (S)), giving the variable display a sense of speed.

In this embodiment, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern combination displayed after the SP reach performance ends. However, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

In addition, the dynamic display of a specific image may not only refer to the flickering flame as described above, but may also include the specific image rotating around the numeric display unit 002SG051, or changing in shape or display color.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which character 002SG074 acts on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby causing specific image 002SG075 to be displayed in motion around number display unit 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 56. In Fig. 56, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing the second modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action enlarges the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol may be displayed moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 56 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while decelerating towards the stopping position, and when it reaches the stopping position and is displayed as temporarily stopped (see Figure 56 (A3)), the base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053 remain displayed as temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 continue to move downward past the stopping position.

At this time, the distance L2 traveled by the numeric display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped (L1 < L2).

After that, having passed the stop position, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 each move upward, and while character display unit 002SG052 is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A5)), character display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 56 (A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when numeric display unit 002SG051 passes upward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped is smaller than the movement distance L2 from when numeric display unit 002SG051 passes downward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped (L3 < L2). Finally, numeric display unit 002SG051 moves downward and is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A7)).

In addition, in Figure 56 (A6), the action in which only the character display part 002SG052 passes through the stopping position and moves upward is an upward action that differs in form from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in Figure 23 (A), and therefore allows the difference from the fluctuation start action to be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stopping position, rather than being displayed as temporarily stopped at the exact moment it reaches the stopping position, at least some of the multiple seed display parts that make up the decorative pattern are displayed as if they have passed the stopping position, then moved to the opposite side and returned to the stopping position. This makes it appear as if some of the display parts have passed by with force, adding a sense of realism.

Furthermore, by temporarily stopping the first display unit (e.g., base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053) among the multiple display units at a stop position while having the other second display units (e.g., number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052) pass through the stop position, movement can be imparted without making the stop position unclear. Furthermore, by varying the movement distances passed by one of the second display units, number display unit 002SG051, and the other, character display unit 002SG052, it is possible to display movement that matches the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the third modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at a stop position in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols before and after the decorative symbol temporarily displayed at that stop position are not temporarily displayed, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a miss variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when one of the decorative symbols (e.g., decorative symbol "3") is temporarily displayed at a stop position, some of the decorative symbols before and after it (e.g., decorative symbol "2", decorative symbol "4") may also be temporarily displayed.

When one of the decorative symbols that was being variably displayed (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figures 57(A) and (B)), and a variable stop action is performed (see Figures 57(C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable stop action is performed on the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped at the stop position, and that the variable stop action is not performed on decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in areas other than the stop position.

By doing this, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily enlarged, thereby drawing the player's attention to the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and keeping the player's gaze on the area where the decorative symbols are displayed, even when a losing combination that would not normally make sense to the player is derived. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols that are not located in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not enlarged, allowing the player's gaze to be focused on the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and also reducing the load on display control.

In addition, since loop light emission control continues even when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 42 and 43), control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d can be simplified. Furthermore, if multiple valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative patterns temporarily displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other Modifications)
Furthermore, when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, only the number display unit 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left or right side of the display screen) by a specific action including a first predetermined action in which the left and right decorative patterns that form the reach mode move toward the front side of the display screen and a second predetermined action in which the decorative patterns move toward the back side of the display screen, and in this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative patterns is faster in the second predetermined action than in the first predetermined action.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative pattern is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 and the information display section 002SG053. When the variable display starts, the number display section 002SG051 may be able to execute a number variable start action that is different from the scrolling display, and the information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute an information display variable start action in conjunction with the number variable start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variable start action may end before the number variable start action ends, causing the information display section 002SG053 to be erased.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which either the first or second presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, the third presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and the fourth presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, or three or more presentation modes may be executable in a high base state.

In addition, the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a first scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the first presentation mode, a second scrolling display that curves and moves from the back to the front in the second presentation mode, a rotating display in the third presentation mode, and a third scrolling display in the vertical direction in the fourth presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be modified in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states may also be a time-saving state, a probability variable state, a small jackpot game state, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to execute variable display than the normal state and have a shorter average variable display period, are a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variable state (high probability high base state), and an example is given of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the probability variable state at the end of a jackpot game.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is part of the case where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game can be called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled after the end of an advantageous state or in a low-probability state after RAM clearing (a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled to an advantageous state can be called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low-probability state can be called time-saving state C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to enter the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may be varied depending on the type of variable display result that results in winning the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, while the above embodiment applies to a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, or assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning, as well as slot machines. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

[Example]
Further, the mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Form 1-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect until when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect.
the type of background image displayed on the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed;
Before a specific effect is executed and after a fragment image in the specific effect is displayed, the type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different (see Figures 90 to 93, 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect that displays a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, thereby surprising the player at various times; furthermore, since the types of background images are different before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even if the effect displays similar fragment images, different impressions can be given in a desirable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-2 is
Both predetermined effects and specific effects can be executed in one variable display,
When a specific effect is executed without a predetermined effect being executed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a specific effect is executed without a predetermined effect being executed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature draws attention to the execution status of the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-3 is
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image that is more advantageous than the first background image;
The first predetermined part can be executed while the first background image is displayed,
a second background image is displayed during execution of the second predetermined part;
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background promotion effect different from the predetermined effect is executed,
When the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the second background image is displayed by the second background teasing effect (see FIG. 87).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect or the second background preview effect.

[Form 1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-1 is
In one variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed,
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The specific effect is an effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
Before the execution of a specific effect, when a predetermined effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten interest by making the player expect that both the predetermined effect and the specific effect will be executed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-2 is
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The specific effect is an effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The background image includes a first background image before the decoration identification information reaches a reach state, a second background image before the decoration identification information reaches a reach state and more advantageous than the first background image, a third background image after the decoration identification information reaches a reach state, and a fourth background image after the decoration identification information reaches a reach state and more advantageous than the third background image,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed together with the second background image;
The fragment image in the specific effect is displayed together with the fourth background image (see Figures 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature draws attention to the relationship between the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and the background image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-3 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the second background image superimposed thereon to be recognized;
The fragment image in the specific effect is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the fourth background image in a superimposed relationship to be recognized (see FIGS. 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined part and the specific effect can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-4 is
The fragment images can be rotated,
When the image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the second background image superimposed on the image fragment,
When the image fragments are rotated to the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the second background image that is superimposed on the image fragments (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-4-5]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-5 is
When a first image fragment among the plurality of image fragments is at a first angle, a second image fragment among the plurality of image fragments is at a second angle (see FIGS. 140 and 146 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-5]
The gaming machine of form 1-5 is
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction,
A fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a predetermined direction (see FIG. 141 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-6]
The gaming machine of form 1-6 is
the image fragments in the second predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments;
The fragment images in the specific effect are displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see FIG. 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows fragment images to be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-7-1]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-1 is
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance have the same period of time required for them to disappear from the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 132 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 1-7-2]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-2 is
The visibility of the fragment images that are displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and when they are no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 132 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-3 is
The fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a predetermined effect (see FIG. 141).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows fragment images to be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
The gaming machine of form 1-8 is
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance can rotate,
The number of rotational actions performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means is the same as the number of rotational actions performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is displayed until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 2-1]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect until when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
the display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when a transition is made from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image is displayed in a specific effect;
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to view the image fragments over a first period, but it is possible to view the image fragments over a second period after the first period has elapsed (see FIGS. 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and furthermore, the sense of incongruity when a fragment image is displayed by an effect image can be reduced, allowing the predetermined effect and the specific effect to be executed suitably.

[Form 2-2]
The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period (see FIGS. 120 and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 2-3]
The gaming machine of type 2-3 is
The execution period of the first predetermined part is longer than the execution period of the second predetermined part,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see FIG. 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment image can be displayed without any sense of incongruity by starting the display of the effect image.

[Form 2-4]
The gaming machine of type 2-4 is
The display pattern of the effect image is the same between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 109).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 3-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect until when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect.
the image fragments in the second predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments;
The fragment images in the specific effect are displayed in a manner that changes and moves from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the fragment images (see FIGS. 105, 112, 122, 127, and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect that displays a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times.Furthermore, since the speed at which the fragment images are moved is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even if the effects display similar fragment images, different impressions can be given, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Form 3-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
In one variable display, a predetermined effect can be executed multiple times, while a specific effect can be executed once,
When the predetermined effect is executed multiple times, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed once,
When a specific effect is executed once, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a predetermined effect is executed multiple times (see Figures 90 to 93).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
This feature draws attention to the execution status of the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-3]
The gaming machine of form 3-3 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific effect is displayed,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 105(C) and FIG. 112(C)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
The gaming machine of type 3-4-1 is
The fragment images in the specific effect are displayed in a manner moving at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing during the display period, and are displayed in a manner moving at a second speed over a second period from the specific timing to when the fragment images are no longer displayed in the display area of the display means,
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 129 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 3-4-2]
The gaming machine of type 3-4-2 is
An effect image can be displayed at the timing when a fragment image is displayed in a specific effect,
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 127, 129, and 138).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

[Form 3-5]
The gaming machine of type 3-5 is
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance can rotate,
The number of rotational actions performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational actions performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is displayed until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 146 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 4-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect until when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an opaque image that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed thereon,
The fragment image in a specific effect is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship to be recognized (see FIGS. 105, 112, 116, 117, 122, 127, and 139).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect that displays a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times.Furthermore, because the display manner of the fragment image differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even if the effect displays similar fragment images, it gives a suitably different impression, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 4-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The specific effect is an effect that includes displaying a special image together with the fragment image,
The fragment image and the special image in the specific performance are in a superimposed relationship,
The first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image to be recognized,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the special image to be recognized,
The third fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is a transparent image that allows recognition of both at least a part of the background image and at least a part of the special image (see FIG. 139).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the display mode of the fragment images for each effect, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-1 is
The fragment images in certain effects can rotate,
When the first image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the first image fragment;
When the rotation operation causes the first image fragment to be at the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the first image fragment (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 4-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 4-3-2 is
In a specific effect, when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a first angle, a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIGS. 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 5-1]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect until when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction,
A fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a predetermined direction (see Figures 105, 112, 122, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect that displays a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times.Furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the time required for them to disappear is different, so even if the effects both display fragment images in the same way, different impressions can be given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 5-2]
The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The visibility of the fragment images that are displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and when they are no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 134 and 138).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 5-3]
The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
The fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a predetermined effect (see FIG. 141).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference is made between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, and interest can be increased by a variety of presentation methods.

[Form 5-4]
The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
All of the image fragments in the second predetermined part are hidden in a manner that they move out of the display area of the display means (see, for example, FIG. 140(A) ),
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific effect is hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display area of the display means,
A second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific performance, is hidden before moving out of the display area of the display means (see, for example, FIG. 140(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently in the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, which can increase interest.

[Form 6-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from the first crack pattern to a second crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which an object image is displayed, and in response to the movement of the object image, a plurality of fragment images are started to be displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image of a first crack form is displayed in a predetermined effect until when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed;
The execution timing is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part may be executed or may not be executed;
The period from when the crack precursor image of the second crack type is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined effect is longer than the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from when it is displayed until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
In a specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from when it is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 106 to 108, 116, 117, 123, and 124).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect that displays a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times.Furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed, and the display period of the fragment image, differ between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even if the effect displays similar fragment images, different impressions can be given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
The second predetermined part has a longer execution period than the first predetermined part (see Figures 116, 117, 122, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the interest of a given presentation from being reduced due to a monotonous presentation configuration.

[Form 6-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-3 is
When the second predetermined part is executed and then the third predetermined part is not executed, a fourth predetermined part can be executed in which a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern is continuously displayed for a period longer than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part (see FIG. 123).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably indicate that the third predetermined part will not be executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-1 is
The predetermined effect is an effect that makes the decoration identification information reach a state,
There are a first pattern in which a predetermined effect is executed and the decoration identification information is in a reach state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
When the variable display is performed according to the first pattern, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the variable display is performed according to the second pattern (see FIG. 123).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature draws attention to the execution of the predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-2 is
In one variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed,
The specific effect can be executed after the third predetermined part is executed,
Before the execution of the specific performance, when the third predetermined part is executed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, attention can be drawn to the execution of the third predetermined part in the predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-5]
The gaming machine of form 6-5 is
At a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific effect is displayed, an effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 106(G) and FIG. 108(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-6]
The gaming machine of form 6-6 is
The predetermined effect is an effect that makes the decoration identification information reach a state,
The decoration identification information in the reach state can be highlighted in the third predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the period during which the decoration identifying information in the reach state is highlighted is longer than the period during which the fragment images are displayed (see Figures 107(I) to 107(K)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably indicate that a reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-1 is
A motion emphasizing image can be displayed in the first predetermined part in accordance with the motion of the object image,
It can be displayed in a display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer,
A motion-enhanced image is displayed at the same time as the display of the crack precursor image of the crack pattern starts (see FIG. 106(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack precursor image can be changed to a cracked appearance without creating an unnatural appearance.

[Form 6-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-2 is
A small fragment image can be displayed along with the display of the motion-enhanced image;
The display period of the small fragment image is longer than the display period of the motion-enhanced image (see FIG. 106(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to suitably indicate that the crack precursor image has changed to a cracked state.

[Form 6-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-3 is
In the second predetermined part, an effect image can be displayed in accordance with the movement of the object image,
When displaying an effect image, the action emphasis image is not displayed (see FIG. 106(H) and FIG. 123).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference is provided between the first predetermined part and the second predetermined part, and it is possible to prevent the predetermined presentation from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-4 is
The period required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part to disappear from the display area of the display means is different from the period required for the small fragment image in the third predetermined part to disappear from the display area of the display means (FIG. 123).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently in the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part, which can increase interest.

[Form 6-8]
The gaming machines of types 6-8 are:
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image superimposed thereon to be recognized,
The fragment image in the specific effect is an opaque image that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see Figures 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the fragment images can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
The gaming machine of form 6-9 is
the image fragments in the third predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments;
The fragment images in the specific effect are displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see FIG. 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows fragment images to be displayed naturally.

[Form 6-10]
The gaming machine of form 6-10 is
The period from when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed until when it disappears in the display area of the display means is longer than the period from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until when it disappears in the display area of the display means (see Figures 123 and 124).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference is made between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, and interest can be increased by a variety of presentation methods.

[Form 7-1]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute an action promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an action on the action detection means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The action prompting image can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect until when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance.
The action prompting effect is an effect in which an action prompting image is displayed over the action valid period, and when a player's action is detected, the display mode of the action prompting image is changed from an action prompting mode to an action completion mode,
When the action promotion image changes from the action promotion mode to the action completion mode due to the action promotion effect, a specific effect can be executed,
During at least a portion of the execution period of the specific effect, it is possible to view both the action prompting image of the action completion mode and the fragment image in the specific effect,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific effect is shorter than the display period of the action prompting image in the action prompting mode and longer than the display period of the action prompting image in the action completion mode (see FIGS. 102, 103, 112, 120, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image and the specific effect that displays a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, thereby surprising the player at various times and further preventing the interest of the specific effect from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation structure.

[Form 8-1]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings.
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have different execution periods,
the type of background image displayed on the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed;
The type of background image displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the third predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed (see FIGS. 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times; furthermore, since the types of background images are different before and after the fragment image is displayed in common in the first and second predetermined effects, even effects that display similar fragment images can give different impressions in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Form 8-2]
The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed;
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period in which the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part is different in length from the period in which the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the dramatic effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 9-1]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings,
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have different execution periods,
the display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when a transition occurs from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when a transition occurs from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part;
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to view the image fragments over a first period, but it is possible to view the image fragments over a second period after the first period has elapsed (see FIGS. 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and furthermore, the sense of incongruity when the fragment image is displayed by the effect image can be reduced, so that the first and second predetermined effects can be executed suitably.

[Form 9-2]
The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed;
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period in which the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part is different in length from the period in which the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 102, 103, and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the dramatic effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 10-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings,
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have different execution periods,
the image fragments in the second predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments;
The image fragments in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that changes and moves from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the image fragments (see FIGS. 102, 103, 110, 111, 120, 126, and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects that display the crack precursor image and the fragment images can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times. Furthermore, since the speed at which the fragment images are displayed varies between the first and second predetermined effects, even if the effects display similar fragment images, different impressions can be given, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Form 10-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
an effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the third predetermined part transitions to a fourth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 110(H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be made different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-1 is
the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner moving at a first speed over a first period from when the display starts until a specific timing, and is displayed in a manner moving at a second speed over a second period from the specific timing until when the fragment image is no longer displayed;
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 129 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently in the first predetermined presentation and the second predetermined presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-2 is
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, an effect image can be displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 110 and 129 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

[Form 10-4]
The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
All of the image fragments in the second predetermined part are hidden from view by moving out of the display area of the display means (see FIG. 140(A) ).
a first fragment image among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is hidden in a manner of moving out of the display area of the display means;
A second image fragment, which is different from the first image fragment, among the image fragments in the fourth predetermined part is hidden from view before moving out of the display area of the display means (see FIG. 140(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently in the first predetermined presentation and the second specific presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-5]
The gaming machine of form 10-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image superimposed thereon to be recognized,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image superimposed thereon to be recognized (see FIGS. 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-1 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction;
The fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figures 75 and 133).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-2 is
The visibility of fragment images that are displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when they start to be displayed and when they are hidden (see FIGS. 75 and 133).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-1 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part can be rotated;
the number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is displayed until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 146 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-2 is
When the image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the image fragment,
When the image fragments are rotated to the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the image fragments (see Figures 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-3 is
When the first image fragment is at a first angle, the second image fragment among the plurality of image fragments is at a second angle (see FIGS. 140 and 146 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-8]
The gaming machine of form 10-8 is
In one variable display, both the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed,
The first predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
When the first predetermined effect is executed before the second predetermined effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first predetermined effect is not executed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-9]
The gaming machine of form 10-9 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed;
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period in which the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part is different in length from the period in which the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 120 and 126).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 11-1]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings,
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have different execution periods,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an opaque image that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed thereon,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image superimposed thereon to be recognized (see FIGS. 105, 102, 103, 122, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and further, because the display mode of the fragment image differs between the first and second predetermined effects, even if the effects display similar fragment images, they can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Form 12-1]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings,
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have different execution periods,
the fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions, at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction;
The fragment image that moves in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that moves in a predetermined direction;
The fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figures 102, 103, 110, 111, 120, and 126).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times. Furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment image moves is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the time required for it to disappear is different, so that even in effects that display similar fragment images, different impressions can be given in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 13-1]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack form in accordance with the movement of the object image, a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from the first crack form to a second crack form in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect including a fourth predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a third crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image in accordance with the movement of the object image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings,
The first predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part have different execution periods,
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part may be executed or may not be executed;
The period from the start of the second predetermined part to the transition to the third predetermined part is longer than the period from the start of the fourth predetermined part to the transition to the fifth predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from when it is displayed until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
In the fifth predetermined part, the image fragments require a second period different from the first period from when they are displayed until when they are no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 102, 103, 106, 107, 123, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects that display the crack precursor image and the fragment images can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times. Furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment images are displayed, and the display period of the fragment images, differ between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects that display similar fragment images can give different impressions in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Form 13-2]
The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack form according to the movement of the object image,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state and displayed (see FIGS. 106 and 102).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 14-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect can be executed at a specific timing after the first predetermined effect is executed,
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have the same length of the execution period,
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part have the same length of the execution period,
When the second predetermined performance is executed after the first predetermined performance, the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is made invisible in the display area of the display means, and then the third predetermined part is started (see FIGS. 99, 100, and 118).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, which display a crack precursor image and a fragment image, can be executed consecutively, thereby continuously surprising the player, and further, since the third predetermined part starts after the fragment image in the second predetermined part has disappeared, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the presentation effect caused by a new crack precursor image being displayed even though a fragment image is already being displayed.

[Form 14-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction;
The positions at which the display of the image fragments starts are different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see FIGS. 99, 100, and 141).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently between the first predetermined presentation and the second predetermined presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-3]
The gaming machine of form 14-3 is
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part can commonly display a special image together with the fragment image,
The special image in the second predetermined part is displayed in the first manner,
The special image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (see FIG. 99(F) and FIG. 100(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special image is displayed differently in the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-4]
The gaming machine of form 14-4 is
The second and fourth predetermined parts have different lengths of display periods for the fragment images, but the lengths of display periods for the special images are the same (see FIG. 118 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently between the first predetermined presentation and the second predetermined presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-5]
The gaming machine of form 14-5 is
There are a first pattern in which the second predetermined effect is executed after the first predetermined effect is executed, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined effect is not executed after the first predetermined effect is executed,
The rate at which the game progresses according to the first pattern is more advantageous than the rate at which the game progresses according to the second pattern (see FIG. 84).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-6]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
the image fragments in the second predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments;
The image fragments in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments (see FIG. 129 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the relationship between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be increased, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-1 is
an effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the third predetermined part transitions to a fourth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is the same between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 99(C), 100(C), and 118).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be improved.

[Form 14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period (see FIG. 118 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be improved.

[Form 15-1]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified by the notification effect that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack form is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image are displayed;
the fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period of time until it disappears from the display area of the display means;
When the notification effect notifies that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 102, 103, 115, 120, and 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, thereby surprising the player, and furthermore, by displaying the crack precursor image together with a fragment image that takes a different period of time to disappear than the fragment image in the predetermined effect, it is possible to notify the player that the game is not being controlled appropriately to an advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
The display period of the break precursor image when it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state is longer than the display period of the break precursor image in the first predetermined part (see FIG. 120).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to effectively indicate that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 15-3]
The gaming machine of form 15-3 is
a first image fragment having the largest display size among the plurality of image fragments in the second predetermined part;
a second fragment image having the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images when it is notified that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state;
The first image fragment is displayed in a larger size than the second image fragment (see, for example, FIG. 103(J) and FIG. 115(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are displayed, enhancing interest.

[Form 15-4]
The gaming machine of form 15-4 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image superimposed thereon to be recognized,
When it is notified that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state, the fragment image is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image to be recognized in a superimposed relationship (see FIG. 130).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are displayed, enhancing interest.

[Form 15-5]
The gaming machine of form 15-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is notified that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state are commonly displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction (see, for example, FIGS. 75 and 134).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the fragment images to be displayed in a way that is relevant to the viewer, enhancing their interest.

[Form 15-6]
The gaming machine of form 15-6 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 115(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be differentiated to increase interest.

[Form 16-1]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect, a crack precursor image of a second crack mode can be displayed;
When the crack precursor image of the first crack form is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern;
When the crack precursor image of the second crack form is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting pattern,
The light emitting means continues to emit light in the first light emitting pattern until the second predetermined part is executed;
The light emission of the light emitting means according to the second light emission pattern continues until a predetermined condition is met after the notification effect in which it is notified that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state has ended (see FIGS. 102, 103, 115, 120, and 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, thereby surprising the player, and furthermore, by using the crack precursor image and a second light-emitting pattern that continues until a predetermined condition is met after the end of the notification effect, it is possible to notify the player that the device is not being properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect, a crack precursor image of a second crack mode can be displayed;
The type of background image is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed (see FIGS. 102(A) to 102(F) and 103(I) to 103(K)).
The display mode of the background image is different before the notification effect notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and when the fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state (see FIGS. 115(A), 115(B), 115(D), 120, and 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, thereby surprising the player, and furthermore, by using the crack precursor image and changing the display mode of the background image before it is announced whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player that it will not be properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 18-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a second crack type, a fifth predetermined part that starts a first operation of the movable body, and a sixth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings,
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends after the fragment image is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and furthermore, by operating the movable body to display the fragment image after displaying the crack precursor image, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period in which the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part is different in length from the period in which the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 120 and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-1 is
an effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when the fifth predetermined part transitions to a sixth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 105(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be differentiated to increase interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-2 is
The first action is an action in which the movable body moves from the home position toward the advanced position,
When the movable body is placed at the advanced position, the display of the effect image starts (see FIG. 105(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 18-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-3 is
The period of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 122 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
The gaming machine of form 18-4 is
A suggestion effect that is different from the second predetermined effect and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body can be executed,
A movable body emphasis image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a moving body emphasis image is displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body in the suggestion performance, a moving body emphasis image is not displayed in accordance with the first movement of the moving body in the fifth predetermined part (see FIG. 122 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect including a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type together with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings.
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends before the fragment image is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see Figures 102, 103, 113, 114, 120, and 128(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and furthermore, by operating the movable body to display the crack precursor image, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period in which the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part is different in length from the period in which the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 120 and 128).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-1 is
an effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when the fourth predetermined part transitions to a fifth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 113(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-2 is
The second action is an action in which the movable body moves from the advanced position toward the origin position,
When the second action is started, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 113(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 19-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-3 is
The period of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see FIG. 128 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 19-4]
The gaming machine of form 19-4 is
A suggestion effect that is different from the second predetermined effect and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body can be executed,
A movable body emphasis image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a moving body emphasis image is displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body in the suggestion performance, a moving body emphasis image is not displayed in accordance with the first movement of the moving body in the fourth predetermined part (see FIG. 128 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 20-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which, in response to a first operation of the movable body, the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect until when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect.
In a specific performance, the movable body can perform a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body is started after the fragment image is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means (see Figures 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the specific effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and furthermore, by operating the movable body to display the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image, it is possible to provide a powerful effect.

[Form 20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-1 is
The first action is an action in which the movable body moves from the home position toward the advanced position,
When the first action is started, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 109(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the specific presentation.

[Form 20-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-2 is
the effect image can be displayed over a display period including the first display period and the second display period;
The length of the first operation period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are substantially the same,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific effect is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the effect of specific effects.

[Form 20-3]
The gaming machine of form 20-3 is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body emphasis image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a moving body emphasis image is displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body in the suggestion performance, a moving body emphasis image is not displayed in accordance with the first movement of the moving body in the specific performance (see FIG. 125).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the effect of a specific presentation from being reduced by the moving body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings,
Even if a crack precursor image of the first crack form or the second crack form is displayed, the background image can be viewed together with the crack precursor image,
When the crack precursor image of the first crack form or the second crack form is not displayed, an image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer is displayed with a first visibility;
the background image when the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect is displayed is displayed with a second visibility that is lower than the first visibility;
When the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed, an image displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer is displayed with the second visibility over a predetermined range, and with the first visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (see FIGS. 102(E), (F), 104(C), 120, and 121).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, which display crack precursor images with different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times.Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the crack precursor image differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even effects that display similar crack precursor images can give different impressions in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 21-2]
The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility that is higher than the first visibility and the second visibility (see the enlarged view in FIG. 104(C) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
A corresponding image corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
When the crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack mode, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed in a predetermined range, but not in a specific range (see FIG. 104(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the corresponding image can be displayed appropriately even during the execution of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 21-4]
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
The display period of the crack precursor image of the second crack form is longer than the display period of the crack precursor image of the first crack form (see FIG. 121 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way the cracking precursor image is displayed can be made different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-1]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings.
The visibility of the background image is different when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed,
The crack precursor image of the second crack form has a longer display period than the crack precursor image of the first crack form,
There are several types of images of the second type of crack precursor.
The expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when a crack precursor image of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed than when a crack precursor image of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed (see Figures 101 to 103, 119, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, which each display a crack precursor image with a different crack pattern, can be executed at different times, thereby surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, the player will pay attention to the type of crack precursor image with the second crack pattern, so that even effects that display similar crack precursor images can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 22-2]
The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
When a crack precursor image of the first type of second crack form is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer is different from when a crack precursor image of the second type of second crack form is displayed (see Figures 102 and 101).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the crack precursor image is displayed, increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can commonly display an effect image of a specific color,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first predetermined effect and the second timing predetermined effect (see FIGS. 102 and 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be differentiated to increase interest.

[Form 23-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
A change effect can be executed to change the display mode of the corresponding image corresponding to the variable display,
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means is
A corresponding image corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in the special display layer;
The first crack precursor image can be displayed on a first predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The second crack precursor image can be displayed on a second predetermined display layer having a lower priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined effect is an effect in which a first crack precursor image is displayed,
The second predetermined effect is an effect in which a second crack precursor image is displayed,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings.
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases,
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the change effect is not executed,
When the second predetermined performance is executed, a change performance can be executed (see FIGS. 102 to 104, 120, 121, and 148).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect that displays the first cracking precursor image and the second predetermined effect that displays the second cracking precursor image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times.Furthermore, even in effects that similarly display a cracking precursor image, the presence or absence of a display layer or a change effect differs, so different impressions can be given in an appropriate manner, and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-1 is
The change effect is an effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed and the predetermined object image performs an action that affects the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display;
The predetermined object image can be displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 148).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the change effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the second predetermined effect to a minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-2 is
In response to the movement of a predetermined object image, a change highlighting image can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer (see FIG. 148).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the change effect can be preferably executed even during the execution of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
A first predetermined effect can be executed, which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
A second predetermined effect can be executed, which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
After the second predetermined effect is executed, a special effect can be executed.
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different execution timings,
The fragment image in the first predetermined effect and the fragment image in the second predetermined effect have different display modes,
The fragment image in the second predetermined effect includes an image in a suggestive state that suggests that a special effect will be executed,
The display period of the fragment images in the second predetermined effect is longer than the display period of the fragment images in the first predetermined effect (see FIGS. 102, 120, 125, 149, and 150).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times; furthermore, the display manner of the fragment image differs between the first and second predetermined effects, and the correlation between the fragment image in the second predetermined effect and the effect executed thereafter can be increased, so that even effects that display similar fragment images can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
There are two special effects: Special 1 and Special 2.
When the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first special effect is executed,
The suggestion mode includes a first suggestion mode suggesting that a first special effect will be executed and a second suggestion mode suggesting that a second special effect will be executed (see FIGS. 149, 150, and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined effect includes a suggestive mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of a background image displayed on a layer lower than the specific display layer can be seen,
The fragment images in the transparent mode are displayed more frequently than the fragment images in the suggestive mode (see FIG. 151 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-2 is
The fragment images can be rotated,
In the second predetermined performance, the transparent fragment image has a larger rotation amount than the suggestive fragment image (see FIG. 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-4]
The gaming machine of form 24-4 is
The second predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part,
In the first predetermined part, a plurality of fragment images in a suggestive manner are displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent manner are displayed;
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image in a suggestive mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 150 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined effect is executed, the pre-effect (FIG. 109(C)) can be executed.
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 137(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 137(B2) to (B5)),
The execution period of the first stage performance is longer than the display period of the cracked image of the first mode (see FIGS. 125 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the preliminary effects create a build-up to the crack, and the crack image of the first mode gives a sense of speed, thereby realizing a suitable crack pattern.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined effect is executed, the pre-effect (FIG. 109(C)) can be executed.
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 137(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 137(B2) to (B5)),
The combined period during which the cracked image is displayed in the first mode and the second mode is longer than the execution period of the first stage performance (see FIGS. 125 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period during which the cracked image is in the first and second modes is made longer than the execution period of the first stage performance, thereby making the cracked pattern more memorable.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed on a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap at least partially,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than that of the cracked image.
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the broken image over a first period, and the broken image can be visually recognized over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIGS. 118 to 128 and 75 to 138 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image has the role of hiding the initial display portion of the cracked image, and while fulfilling this role, it prevents the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed on a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including, after displaying a cracked image of a first aspect, changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect,
The display means displays an effect image when displaying the cracked image of the first mode, and does not display the effect image at a timing before displaying the cracked image of the second mode (see FIGS. 118 to 128 and 75 to 138 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from feeling unnatural.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 136(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 136(B2) to (B5)),
The transmittance of the broken image of the second aspect is different between the first timing and the second timing in the display period of the broken image of the second aspect (see FIGS. 124 and 136 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the dramatic effect when the cracked image of the second mode is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute specific effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes, after displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 75(B1)), changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 75(B2) to (B5)),
The specific effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image of the third mode (FIG. 136(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third mode to a fourth mode (FIG. 136(B2) to (B5)).
The transmittance of the broken image at a predetermined timing after the display of the second mode broken image starts is different from that of the broken image at a specific timing after the display of the fourth mode broken image starts (see FIGS. 120, 124, 75, 136, and 140(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the dramatic effect can be enhanced when the broken image of the second mode is displayed and when the broken image of the fourth mode is displayed.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute specific effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed in a normal state, and includes displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 75(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 75(B2) to (B5)),
The specific effect is an effect that can be executed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, and includes displaying a cracked image of the third mode (FIG. 136(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third mode to the fourth mode (FIG. 136(B2) to (B5)).
The transmittance of the broken image at a predetermined timing after the display of the second mode broken image starts is different from that of the broken image at a specific timing after the display of the fourth mode broken image starts (see FIGS. 87 to 89, 120, 124, 75, 136, and 140(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the dramatic effect can be enhanced when the broken image of the second mode is displayed and when the broken image of the fourth mode is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
A background image can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The light emission control means
When the cracked image is displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled using the specific brightness data table;
The light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a specific brightness data table until a specific timing during the display period of the broken image, and after the specific timing, the light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a brightness data table corresponding to the background image (see Figures 118 to 120 and 123).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably control the light emission of the light emitting means when a broken image is displayed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed on a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap at least partially,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see FIGS. 118 to 124).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to a cracked image when the cracked image is displayed in the first pattern (see FIG. 118), but does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed in the second pattern (see FIG. 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed in the first pattern (see FIG. 118), and outputs a sound informing the player that the game is being controlled to an advantageous state when the cracked image is displayed in the second pattern (see FIG. 128).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions depending on the gaming status.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed at a timing before the crack image is displayed in a case where the crack image is displayed in a first pattern, and
the sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed in the first pattern (see FIG. 118), and does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed in the second pattern (see FIG. 125);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The sound output means is
A predetermined sound can be output when the crack precursor image is displayed,
A specific sound can be output when a cracked image is displayed.
The specific sound output by the sound output means is a sound louder than the predetermined sound (see FIG. 145).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to create a contrast between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the crack image is displayed, and to make a good impression when the crack image is displayed.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in conjunction with the motion display of the object image,
The sound output means is
When the cracking precursor image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the object image can be output;
When a cracked image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the cracked image can be output (see FIG. 145).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to create a contrast between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the crack image is displayed, and to make a good impression when the crack image is displayed.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern and a second pattern,
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, so that the movement speeds of the fragment images of a first size in the first pattern are different from those of the fragment images of a second size smaller than the first size,
In the second pattern, the amount of variation is 0, so that the motion speed of the third size image fragments in the second pattern is the same as that of the fourth size image fragments that are smaller than the third size (see FIGS. 130 and 131).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first pattern is a cracking pattern in which the animation effect varies depending on the size, with small fragment images flying quickly and large fragment images being somewhat slower and falling quickly, and can be used when you want to show realistic movement, while the second pattern is a cracking pattern in which all fragments are affected by the animation in the same way, flying and falling in the same way, regardless of size, allowing you to select an appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The image of the debris is displayed in a falling manner after it starts to be displayed,
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern and a second pattern,
The gravity values set in the first and second patterns are different, which causes the falling speed of the image fragments to differ (see Figures 130 and 131).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the parameter values and changing the speed at which the fragment images fall, a variety of patterns can be created, enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern and a second pattern,
The direction of gravity is set differently between the first and second patterns, which results in different directions of movement of the fragment images when they are displayed (see FIGS. 130 and 131).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the parameter values and changing the direction in which the fragment images move, a variety of patterns can be created, enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
the first pattern includes a first parameter related to displaying the image fragments and a second parameter related to displaying the image fragments;
the second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter;
the third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter;
The first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern have a common value for the first parameter and different values for the second parameter (see FIGS. 130 and 131 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the value of the first parameter is fixed, creating common parts for the fragment images, while the value of the second parameter is varied to create a variety of patterns, thereby making it possible to create stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment images.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
the first pattern includes a first parameter related to displaying the image fragments and a second parameter related to displaying the image fragments;
the second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter;
the third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter;
The first pattern and the second pattern have a common value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter,
The second pattern and the third pattern have different values of the first parameter and the same value of the second parameter (see FIGS. 130 and 131 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, each pattern creates common parts for the image fragments while being configured with different parameter values, making it possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the image fragments.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
before the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 87, 89, 102 to 104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the broken image is displayed in the normal state and when the broken image is displayed in the special state, different impressions are given, which can increase interest.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed on a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including, after displaying a cracked image of a first aspect, changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
An effect image is displayed when the cracked image of the first mode is displayed, and the effect image is not displayed at a timing before the cracked image of the second mode is displayed (see FIGS. 87, 89, 102, and 103).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from feeling unnatural.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The crack image displayed by the first pattern and the crack image displayed by the second pattern are commonly displayed in a manner moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The moving speed of the cracked image displayed by the first pattern is different from that of the cracked image displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 87, 89, 102 to 104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect during the special state can be enhanced by displaying a cracked image pattern that does not disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The degree of expectation that will be controlled to an advantageous state when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the degree of expectation that will be controlled to an advantageous state when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 84, 86(C), 87, and 89).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the display pattern of the cracked image, so that the display pattern of the cracked image can attract attention.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed on a predetermined display layer;
A plurality of second type fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
the display period of the first type of image fragment and the display period of the second type of image fragment at least partially overlap each other;
The first type of fragment image is a character-drawn image,
The second type of fragment image is in a transparent state that allows at least a part of the background image displayed on a display layer lower than the specific display layer to be recognized (see FIGS. 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images with different display modes, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed on a predetermined display layer;
A plurality of second type fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
the display period of the first type of image fragment and the display period of the second type of image fragment at least partially overlap each other;
The first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image have different display modes,
The display period of the first type of image fragments is longer than the display period of the second type of image fragments (see FIGS. 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images with different display modes, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a display means;
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the image on a display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
The fragment images displayed in the first area, which is a display area where the movable object does not overlap, are displayed in a larger amount than the fragment images displayed in the second area, which is a display area where the movable object overlaps (see Figures 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragments can be displayed appropriately while the movable body overlaps the display area of the display means.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a display means;
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the image on a display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is displayed in a manner of moving from a first area, which is a display area where the movable object does not overlap, to a second area, which is a display area where the movable object overlaps;
A second image fragment among the plurality of image fragments is displayed in a manner that moves within the first area so as not to enter the second area (see FIGS. 137 and 151 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a fragment image that does not enter the area where the movable body is overlapped allows the viewer to recognize that the object has broken, while a fragment image that passes through the area where the movable body is overlapped provides a dynamic effect.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a display means;
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the image on a display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
The fragment image continues to be displayed even after the movable body overlapping the display area of the display means moves to a position where it is no longer overlapping the display area (see Figures 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the image of the fragments can be displayed in an appropriate manner so that the image of the fragments is not overlooked while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of first type fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of second type fragment images when the crack precursor image is displayed;
The second type of fragment image takes a shorter time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see FIGS. 106 and 107).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the dramatic effect of displaying the fragment images can be enhanced.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed on the special display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific character appears in common in the display patterns of a plurality of cracked images, thereby increasing the degree of attention paid to the specific character.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A specific character can be displayed on a third display layer having a lower priority than the second display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed on a fourth display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed when the specific character makes an action,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed when the specific character makes an action,
The display means is
When a first type of cracked image is displayed according to a first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character, and the effect image is made non-displayable at a predetermined timing after the first type of cracked image is displayed;
When the second type of cracked image is displayed using the second pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is made non-displayable at a specific timing after the second type of cracked image is displayed (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from feeling unnatural.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed on the special display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of first type fragment images are displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of second type fragment images are displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
the first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that the speed of the fragment image changes from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image,
The second type of image fragments are displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the second type of image fragments (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the speed at which the fragment images move can be changed depending on the type of fragment image display pattern, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed on the special display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
The degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, 106, and 107).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the sense of anticipation for the specific character, and also increases interest by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after the specific character is displayed.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 58 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls as gaming media are shot into this gaming area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols, and the small symbols are displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, right-hit notification images that encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and remaining time-saving display that shows the number of remaining time-saving rounds may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) effect images (object images) such as characters, thereby preventing overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the effect images, thereby preventing overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol makes it possible to determine whether or not a variably displayed symbol is currently being displayed, even if the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize, such as when the effect content, including the variably displayed decorative symbol, momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Based on receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special symbol pending memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first and second special symbols. However, a first special symbol pending memory display area that displays a first pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol pending memory display area that displays a second pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special symbol pending memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a pending display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game is in a normal state, and a display area that displays a pending display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability variable state. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variation state.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 59). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be initiated. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 58, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 59), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 58, the lower left of the gaming area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers ranging from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, with side lamps 9b provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the gaming board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates in response to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 58), and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the gaming board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the gaming board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are each composed of an LED (see Figure 93). The various lamps will be described later.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the play area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 59).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 59).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and will hereinafter be referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or as effects using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Figure 59. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also include electronic circuit mounting boards on which electrical components are mounted to realize specific electrical functions.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a payout device 006SG031, which is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 006SG032, which is installed in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 006SG031 pass. The payout control board 006SG030 can stop driving the payout device 006SG031 depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032.

The payout control board 006SG030 is also connected to a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls the launcher 006SG033, which is capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. Furthermore, signals indicating whether the touch ring 006SG35 is being detected and signals indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launcher 006SG033 are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Also, as shown in Figure 60, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, and therefore the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Furthermore, each layer image drawing area is classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layer image drawing areas being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layer drawing areas being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 61, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as a layer 1 image, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative patterns as a layer 2 image, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging object images such as characters as a layer 3 image, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging break precursor images (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as described below as a layer 4 image, and a glass plate image 006SG301A as an image to be broken, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a fragment image 006SG301B that will be generated when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken as a layer 5 image. Layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and placing 302, Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and placing the action effect image described below as the Layer 6 image, Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and placing the whiteout image 006SG303 described below as the Layer 7 image, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and placing the operation prompt image described below as the Layer 8 image, Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and placing the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) as the Layer 9 image, and Layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and placing the small symbol (4th symbol), first hold memory count, second hold memory count, and right-hit notification image as the Layer 10 image. In addition, a Layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and placing the error display may also be arranged.

The glass plate image 006SG301 drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area is an image that makes the player perceive that the display area of the image display device 5 has been cracked by the action of the character or movable object 32, and the glass plate image 006SG301A drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image that makes the player perceive that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken. Furthermore, the shattered image 006SG302 is an image in which a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A is changed to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken by the action of the character or movable object 32.

Glass plate image 006SG301 is an image that is hidden at the start timing (the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking) of the breaking effects in the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result announcement effect, which will be described later. Glass plate image 006SG301A is also the image (the image to be broken) that is displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 at the start timing (the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking) of the breaking effects in the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result announcement effect, which will be described later.

Furthermore, as described below, the start timing of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is such that the switching between the display of glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A is invisible to the player due to the display of whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displaying a crack can be switched to glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, thereby realizing a crack (moving display of fragment image 006SG302) that would not be expected from the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301, making it possible to make a strong impression on the player with the cracking effect.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in these layer 1 image drawing areas to layer 10 image drawing areas. As shown in Figures 61 and 62, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the lowest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area. Furthermore, if a Layer 11 image drawing area is also placed in the VRAM area, images drawn in the Layer 11 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area.

In other words, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image displayed at the lowest level in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image displayed (with priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is an image displayed (with priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image displayed (with priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is an image displayed (with priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is an image displayed (with priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5. Furthermore, if a layer 11 image drawing area is further disposed in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is an image displayed (with priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area in the image display device 5. Also, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, it is also possible to have a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a layer 1-3 image drawing area instead of the layer 1 image drawing area. In this case, the layer 1-1 image drawing area can draw a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) described later, the layer 1-2 image drawing area can draw a chance background image (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), a normal reach background image, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) described later, and the layer 1-3 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) described later, a large It is possible to draw a hit notification background image (5th background image 006SG085), and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 60(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 60(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 63 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, as shown in Figure 63 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be a "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot C." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the decorative symbol fluctuations in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cold started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that a cold start refers to the process of turning on the power, initializing the data without restoring the data from before power-on, and then making the gaming machine ready to execute various processes. Command 9200H is a power-off recovery command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has hot started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that a hot start refers to the process of turning on the power, and making the gaming machine ready to execute various processes based on backed-up data. A hot start is also referred to as a power-on without initialization, since no initialization is required. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, probability variable state). Note that the high-probability, high-base state is sometimes simply referred to as the "probability variable state."

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the prize-winning judgment result) that indicate the content of the winning judgment result. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" as a winning judgment result, and the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability win). Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates whether the random number value used to determine the variation pattern will be a "non-reach," "super reach," or "other (normal reach)" variation pattern as a winning judgment result.

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 63 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, it may be possible to provide a prize ball number notification command that enables the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command that notifies the game ball that it has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command that notifies the remaining number of variable display times for which the probability variable control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 64 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 64, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result are controlled so that they can be counted. Note that random number values other than these may also be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may also count numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot" as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative patterns, and is one of several pre-prepared types. For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "997".

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 65 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state. In the display result determination table 22, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state when the pachinko game is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 66 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine one of several types of jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state should be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," and "variable jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 66 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," and "Probable jackpot C," in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "Non-probable jackpot," in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed two times (so-called 2 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, "Probable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot, and "Probable jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable jackpot.

The probability variable control and time-saving control that begin after the jackpot gaming state of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C ends are terminated on the condition that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the jackpot gaming state of a non-probability variable jackpot ends is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed or that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state before the 100 variable displays are completed. Therefore, if a recurring jackpot is one of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C, probability variable control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without an intermediate normal state. In other words, the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 66 (A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," "Probable jackpot C," and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." This setting allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type as a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined based on the first start condition being met to start a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition being met to start a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in special games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which results in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second start entry slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 66 (A), the allocation of determination values for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As mentioned above, just as the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A," which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of a special game with a first special symbol may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." For example, in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, fewer judgment values may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" compared to a special game with a first special symbol. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special game with a first special symbol or a second special symbol, the jackpot type may be determined by referencing common table data.

Figures 67 (A) and 67 (B) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game state is normal (low-probability, low-base state) and when the time-saving state or the probability variable state (low-probability, high-base state or high-probability, high-base state), and when the variable display result is a "miss," multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach," respectively, and to correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns are included in miss fluctuation patterns corresponding to when the variable display result is a "miss." A fluctuation pattern corresponding to when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach effect of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach effect of a super reach is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), the following super reach variation patterns are provided: a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop of the decorative symbol and a re-variable display is executed once during the variable display, after which a Super Reach α reach performance is executed via a normal reach, resulting in a miss or a jackpot (PA2-2, PB1-2); a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is not executed, a Super Reach β reach performance is executed via a normal reach, resulting in a miss or a jackpot (PA2-3, PB1-3); and a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, after which a Super Reach β reach performance is executed via a normal reach and a Super Reach α reach performance, resulting in a miss or a jackpot (PA2-4, PB1-4). In this embodiment, the reach effect for Super Reach α corresponds to the weak S reach effect described below, and the reach effects for Super Reach β correspond to the strong S reach effect A and strong S reach effect B described below.

When the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state (low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), the following Super Reach variation patterns are provided: a variation pattern (PA2-6, PB1-6) in which a Super Reach γ reach effect is executed via a normal reach, and the variable display result is either a miss or a jackpot; and a variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-7) in which a Super Reach δ reach effect is executed via a normal reach, and the variable display result is either a miss or a jackpot. In this embodiment, the Super Reach γ reach effect corresponds to the weak S reach effect described below, and the Super Reach δ reach effect corresponds to the strong S reach effect A and strong S reach effect B described below.

As shown in Figure 67, the special chart fluctuation time for the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to that determined type may be determined.

Figure 68 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display being executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 68(A) to 68(D), when the gaming state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the number of reserved memories (number of reserved memories of the same type) of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table A and the value of random number MR3; if the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table B and the value of random number MR3; and if the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table C and the value of random number MR3. Furthermore, when the gaming state is time-saving or probability variable state (high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table D and the value of random number MR3. Then, as shown in Figures 68 (E) and 68 (F), when the gaming state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the value of random number value MR3; when the gaming state is time-saving state or probability variable state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of random number value MR3.

For example, as shown in Figure 68 (A), if miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern after executing one pseudo-consecutive performance. If the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the variation pattern is determined to be variation pattern (PA2-3) which goes through a normal reach and results in a Super Reach β miss; if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be variation pattern (PA2-4) which executes two pseudo consecutive performances, then goes through a normal reach and Super Reach α and results in a Super Reach β miss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 68(B), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once and then a normal reach results in a super reach α miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which a normal reach results in a super reach β miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice and then a normal reach and super reach α results in a super reach β miss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 68(C), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which a pseudo-consecutive performance is executed once and then a normal reach results in a super reach α miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which a normal reach results in a super reach β miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which a pseudo-consecutive performance is executed twice and then a normal reach and super reach α results in a super reach β miss.

Also, as shown in Figure 68 (D), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a short non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5), and if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 551 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-6), If the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5); if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach followed by a super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-6); and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach followed by a super reach delta miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-7).

Also, as shown in Figure 68 (E), when jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1); if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once and then a normal reach results in a super reach α jackpot; if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which a normal reach results in a super reach β jackpot; and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice and then a normal reach and a super reach α results in a super reach β jackpot.

Also, as shown in Figure 68 (F), when jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5); if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) that results in a super reach γ jackpot via a normal reach; and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) that results in a super reach δ jackpot via a normal reach.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of multiple variable patterns for jackpots may differ depending on the type of jackpot. This allows the player to focus on which variable display variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 59 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 006SG150, as shown in FIG. 69, which serves as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 006SG150 shown in FIG. 69 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 006SG152, a game control timer setting unit 006SG153, a game control counter setting unit 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 006SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151A stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151B stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, resulting in a start winning (second start winning), but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 006SG151A associates the reserve number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start entry port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 006SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 006SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 006SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 006SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 006SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 006SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 59 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 59 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 006SG190 as shown in Figure 70 (A). The performance control data storage area 006SG190 shown in Figure 70 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 006SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 006SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A shown in Figure 70 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194. The start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. Furthermore, the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of four commands is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), a designation command, and a variable category command. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating the start win designation command, reserved memory count notification command, designation command, and variable category command and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A has a memory area reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a hold display flag, which is set to a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display, and a continuous break effect flag, which can identify whether or not the item is subject to the continuous break effect described below, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory and the second special symbol hold memory.

If the execution of a hold display effect is not determined in the hold display effect determination process described below, the hold display flag is set to "0," which corresponds to the normal hold display display pattern. If the execution of a hold display effect is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), which corresponds to a hold memory display pattern that is special from the normal display mode (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)). After the hold display effect determination process is executed, the hold display update process described below is executed, so that the active display and hold display are displayed in a mode corresponding to each hold display flag (e.g., a hollow circle (○) if the hold display flag value is "0," a square (◇) if the hold display flag value is "1," and a star (☆) if the hold display flag value is "2"). The value of the continuous break effect flag is set in the continuous break effect setting process described below (see FIG. 83).

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the CPU 120 stores commands starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A. When a start win occurs, the start win slot designation command, reserved symbol number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable symbol category command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command, reserved symbol number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable symbol category command are stored in sequence in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 006SG194A shown in Figure 70(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in Figure 70(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 71, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

Also, if the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the working area by executing the clearing process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 72 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 72. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 72.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process of step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum opening period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the large prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 73. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (006SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (006SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (006SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. When the number of reserved memories of the first special chart in 006SGS102 is not the upper limit value (006SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A is off in 006SGS101 (006SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols has reached the upper limit in 006SGS102 (006SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which corresponds to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (006SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4" as the upper limit) (006SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. When the second reserved symbol count is not the upper limit value in 006SGS105 (006SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "2" (006SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 006SGS103 or 006SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 006SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 (006SGS109). The numerical data indicating each extracted random number value and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (006SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot," and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 006SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (006SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 72.

Following the processing of 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step 006SGS112), and then performs settings to send a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (006SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 72 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 006SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Random number determination process when winning)
FIG. 75(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 006SGS112 of FIG. 74 as the random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature section 006SG, when the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol is initiated, the normal special symbol process (described later) determines whether the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) is set to a "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to a jackpot. In addition, the variable pattern setting process (described later) determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when the game ball is detected in the start winning slot (first starting winning slot or second starting winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at step 006SGS112 to determine whether the special symbol display result is determined to be a static display of a jackpot symbol, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode associated with a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a game ball entering the starting winning hole begins, that is, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the decorative symbol will be, and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120, etc., will execute preview performances such as pre-reading preview performances, as will be described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 75 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the probability variable flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 (step 006SGS121). When the probability variable flag is on, the CPU 103 identifies the probability variable state (high probability, high base state); when the probability variable flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, the CPU 103 identifies the time-saving state (low probability, high base state); and when both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off, the CPU 103 identifies the normal state (low probability base state).

Following the processing of step 006SGS121, the special symbol display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 65 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result extracted in step 006SGS109 of Figure 74 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 006SGS123). The jackpot determination range is set with individual determination values assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" in the special symbol display result determination table selected by the processing of step 006SGS122, and the CPU 103 can determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the random number value MR1 with each determination value one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range can be set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including that random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot."

If step 006SGS123 determines that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if the variable display determines that the result will not be a jackpot (step 006SGS123; N), the transmission setting for the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss," is executed (step 006SGS128), and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on or not, i.e., whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or the guaranteed variable state (step 006SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), loss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set; if the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C are also prepared in advance according to the number of reserved memories. As shown in FIG. 68, of these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, miss fluctuation pattern determination table A assigns a determination value of 1 to 660, which is within the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, to non-reach fluctuation patterns. Miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C assign determination values of 1 to 700 and 1 to 750, respectively, to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C assign a determination value of 901 to 997, which is within the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, to super reach fluctuation patterns.

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A in step 006SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super-reach will always result in a fluctuation pattern of non-reach or super-reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so when determining the initial winning, the determination is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Furthermore, if step 006SGS123 determines that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it determines that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 used for jackpot type determination, as shown in FIG. 75(A) (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects jackpot type determination table data from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table in accordance with the variable special symbol specified in response to the start port buffer value (either the "first special symbol" corresponding to "1" or the "second special symbol" corresponding to "2"). Then, by referencing the selected jackpot type determination table data, it determines which of multiple types the jackpot type will be.

The system also executes settings to send a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type: the second symbol designation command for a variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command for a variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command for a variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command for a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS133). A jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set according to the game state as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 006SGS135), and proceeds to step 006SGS138. In the processing of step 006SGS135, if the game state is normal (low probability, low base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected; if the game state is time-saving or variable probability (low probability, high base state or high probability, high base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table B is set.

In the processing of step 006SGS138, the variable category corresponding to the range of judgment values that includes the random number value MR3 is determined using each variable pattern determination table set in each step and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variable pattern (step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75(B), when at least the variable display result is "miss", there are provided variable categories that will have a variable display mode of "non-reach" regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that will have a variable display mode of "super reach", and an "other" variable category that will have a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and it is sufficient to be able to determine whether or not such a variable category will be selected based on the random number value MR3.

After that, settings are made to send a variable category designation command to the performance control board 12 according to the determination result of the processing in step 006SGS138 (step 006SGS132), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
Figure 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 73 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 76, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of second special symbol reserved memories is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 006SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 006SGS145). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol count counter and determines whether the read value is "0." In this way, the processing of step 006SGS145 is executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is determined to be "0" in step 006SGS141, and determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started before the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

When the number of reserved first special symbols stored in step 006SGS145 is other than "0" (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory unit corresponding to reserve number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 006SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 006SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 65 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, will be a "jackpot" or a "miss." Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," to determine whether the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150). Furthermore, in this step 006SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, a "jackpot" is determined if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, which corresponds to the high probability state (high probability state), and a "miss" is determined if it does not fall within that range. Additionally, if the probability variable flag is off and the state is low (in this embodiment, this is the low probability low base state and low probability high base state), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within this range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 006SGS150, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different determination data (determination values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of a special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state. When the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is determined (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If step 006SGS150 determines that a jackpot has occurred (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 66(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several types of jackpots (step 006SGS153). By referencing the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table: "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," or "variable jackpot C" (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in step 006SGS154, the game state after the jackpot game state ends—either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state—is determined before the fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. The determined jackpot type is stored in correspondence with the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). For example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0," if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, "0" if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, "2," and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, "3." After processing step 006SGS155, proceed to step 006SGS156.

Also, if step 006SGS150 determines that the result is a "miss" (step 006SGS150; N), step 006SGS156 is executed without executing steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the determined result of the jackpot type if the jackpot gaming state is set to a jackpot gaming state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "Probable Jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "Probable Jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 73 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 77, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table according to the state (step 006SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a loss, if the game state is normal and there is one reserved memory for special symbols that execute variable display, the CPU 103 selects loss variation pattern determination table A; if the game state is normal and there are two reserved memories for special symbols that execute variable display, the CPU 103 selects loss variation pattern determination table B; if the game state is normal and there are three reserved memories for special symbols that execute variable display, the CPU 103 selects loss variation pattern determination table C; and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, the CPU 103 selects loss variation pattern determination table D. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is normal, the CPU 103 selects jackpot variation pattern determination table A; and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, the CPU 103 selects jackpot variation pattern determination table B.

Then, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which is stored in a fluctuation random number buffer, for example, the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of several types (step 006SGS162).

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS162, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, depending on the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 006SGS163). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS163, settings are made to send various commands to be used when the special symbol fluctuation begins (step 006SGS164). For example, when the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is "1," the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in ROM 101 of a pre-prepared first fluctuation start command table in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155, in order to sequentially send a game status designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a first pending memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of a pre-prepared second variation start command table in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155, in order to sequentially send a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a second pending memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 006SGS164, the special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of determining the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS165). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is displayed stationary. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which corresponds to the special symbol variation processing (step 006SGS166), and the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission settings in step 006SGS166, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 72 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game status designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a first pending memory number notification command or a second pending memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily; for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the game status designation command, the first pending memory number notification command or the second pending memory number notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing executed in step S113 of FIG. 73 . In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referenced in the special symbol change processing in step S113, terminating the special symbol change, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the stopped symbols (step 006SGS180). If the special symbol change buffer value is "1," indicating the first special symbol, the first special symbol change is terminated on the first special symbol display device 4A. If the special symbol change buffer value is "2," indicating the second special symbol, the second special symbol change is terminated on the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Then, it determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182).

If the jackpot flag is on (step 006SGS182; Y), and if the probability variable flag or time-saving flag is on, the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and time-saving flag to turn them off (step 006SGS184), and configures the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for which a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5, that a jackpot has occurred) (step 006SGS187). The jackpot opening count counter is also set to the number of times it has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or variable jackpot A, 5 times for variable jackpot B, and 2 times for variable jackpot C) (step 006SGS188). The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4," which corresponds to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), step 006SGS191 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), proceed to step 006SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), determine whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0." If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), proceed to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if the game is in a high base state with remaining time-saving counts, the value of the time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS193). It is then determined whether the value of the time-saving count counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS194). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), the time-saving control is terminated by clearing the time-saving flag to the OFF state (step 006SGS195). After that, the process sets up the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability, low base) corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the transmission of a game state specification command is set according to the state of the probability variation flag and time-saving flag. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "0," which corresponds to the normal processing of special symbols, and the special symbol stop processing is then terminated (step 006SGS197).

(Jackpot end processing)
Figure 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S117 of Figure 73 as the jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not running (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, processing ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability jackpot flag and time-saving flag are turned on (step 006SGS207, step 006SGS208). The time-saving counter is also set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and processing proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", after which the program proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is set to the OFF state, and a jackpot termination command corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to be sent (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting up the transmission of a game status specification command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game status based on the ON probability variable flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," which corresponds to normal special symbol processing, and the jackpot termination processing is terminated (step 006SGS216).

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 80. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 80 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a background display update process (step S79) is executed to update the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to processing in step S73.

In addition, the background display update process of this embodiment can execute control to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of specific effects (for example, background change effects and reach effects, described below) during variable display or changes in the game status.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 80 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 81, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a hold display performance determination process (step S160) to determine the display mode of the hold display displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F. It also executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the display mode of the hold display in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F. The hold display update process also serves to start a new display of the hold display or active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the hold display performance determination process. After the hold display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5." In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0," and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Hold display effect determination process)
Figure 82 shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display and active display in the hold display effect shown in Figure 81. In the hold display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 006SGS194A shown in Figure 70 (B) and identifies whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set. If there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the pattern designation command in that entry, and the variable category is identified from the variable category command in that entry, and based on these identified variable display result and variable category, the presence or absence of the hold display effect and the effect pattern, i.e., the display mode of the hold display and active display, are determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 82, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern α, and a 70% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 5% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern α, and a 0% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is a 75% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 20% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern α, and a 5% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern β. Additionally, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using effect pattern α, and a 10% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using effect pattern β.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold display effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "0" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "1" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed using effect pattern α, and sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "2" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed using effect pattern β.

In this embodiment, as described above, after setting a value between 0 and 2 to the hold display flag corresponding to each entry in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (step S61). When the hold display flag value is set to "0", the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display flag is displayed as a white circle (○); when the hold display flag value is set to "1", the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display flag is displayed as a white square (◇); and when the hold display flag value is set to "2", the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

With these settings, when the hold display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A or a white star in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the hold display or active display is displayed as a white circle, and when the hold display or active display is displayed as a white star in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the hold display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A.This allows the player to pay attention to the display mode of these hold displays and active displays, i.e., whether or not a hold display effect is executed and the effect pattern.

(Variable display start setting process)
83 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 81. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 006SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2," and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3."

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is OFF in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is OFF (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 006SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2," and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3."

After executing step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) (step 006SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 006SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form a "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (e.g., decorative pattern combinations such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form an even-numbered symbol as the stopping symbol. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a loss, the system determines a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a reach loss (loss symbol) such as "767" according to the variation pattern.

To determine these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number to determine the stopping symbols, and determine the stopping symbols of the decorative symbols using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 006SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS277) to execute a continuous break effect during variable display, a dialogue preview effect setting process (step 006SGS278) to execute a dialogue preview effect during variable display, a background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) to execute a background change effect during variable display, a reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006SGS280) to execute a reach suggestion effect during variable display, and a cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) to execute a cut-in effect during variable display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern specification command (step 006SGS282) and starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

In addition, the process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all of which are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 006SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern specification command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (step 006SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous Breaking Effect Setting Processing)
84(A) is a flowchart showing the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 83. In the continuous break effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the game state is normal (step 006SGS311). If the game state is normal (step 006SGS311; Y), the start winning time receive command buffer 006SG194A is referenced to identify whether there are any entries for which the continuous break effect flag value ("0" or "1") is not set (step 006SGS312), and whether there are any entries for which the continuous break effect flag value is set (step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the continuous break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), proceed to step 006SGS318. If there is an entry with the value of the continuous break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), determine whether or not to execute the continuous break effect based on the symbol designation command and variable category command stored in that entry (step 006SGS314). Note that in the normal state in this embodiment, the continuous break effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display result of the variable display that has not yet been executed will be a jackpot by executing it multiple times (see Figure 87).

When the game is in the normal state, in step 006SGS314, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines with a 20% probability not to execute the continuous break effect and with a 80% probability to execute the continuous break effect. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines with an 80% probability not to execute the continuous break effect and with a 20% probability to execute the continuous break effect. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), the effect control CPU 120 determines with a 60% probability not to execute the continuous break effect and with a 40% probability to execute the continuous break effect. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines with a 50% probability not to execute the continuous break effect and with a 50% probability to execute the continuous break effect.

Also, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state/probability variable state, in step 006SGS314, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous break effect with a probability of 30%, and determines to execute the continuous break effect with a probability of 70%. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous break effect with a probability of 70%, and determines to execute the continuous break effect with a probability of 30%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous break effect with a probability of 50%, and determines to execute the continuous break effect with a probability of 50%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous break effect with a probability of 40%, and determines to execute the continuous break effect with a probability of 60%. Thus, in this embodiment, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state when the continuous break effect is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation rate, differs between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability variable state.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has decided to execute the consecutive break effect in the processing of step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it has decided to execute the consecutive break effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the value of the consecutive break effect flag for that entry to "1" and proceeds to step 006SGS318. If it has decided not to execute the consecutive break effect (step 006SGS315; N), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the value of the consecutive break effect flag for that entry to "0" and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set to "1," i.e., whether the execution of the consecutive break effect has been decided (step 006SGS318). If there is no entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set to "1" (step 006SGS318; N), the consecutive break effect setting process ends. If there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set to "1" (step 006SGS318; Y), it further determines whether the entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set to "1" corresponds to the variable display, i.e., whether it is an entry stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry for which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set to "1" is not an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; N), the execution setting for the first continuous break effect is performed in response to the fact that the variable display is not a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS320).If the entry for which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display is a variable display based on a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display due to a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous break effect setting process is terminated; if the variable display is a variable display due to a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321; N), the execution setting for the second continuous break effect is performed in accordance with the variable display being the target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is decided to execute a continuous break effect when the game state is normal, the first continuous break effect is executed on the variable display prior to the variable display that is the target of the continuous break effect. Then, if the variable display that is the target of the continuous break effect is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variable pattern, the second continuous break effect is not executed, but if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variable pattern, the second continuous break effect is executed.

If the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state (step 006SGS311; N), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the execution of a continuous break effect according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display and ends the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the presentation control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute a continuous break effect according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display. In this case, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous break effect is determined at the lowest rate, and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous break effect is determined at the highest rate (execution rate of continuous break effect for each fluctuation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous break effect, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach, the variable display is set to execute the continuous break effect (first continuous break effect) once or twice, and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a normal reach or super reach, the variable display is set to execute the first continuous break effect twice and one second continuous break effect after the two first continuous break effects.

In other words, the continuous break effect during the time-saving mode or the probability variation mode in this embodiment is an effect that can be executed multiple times within one variable display, and indicates that a reach will occur depending on the number of times it is executed.

(Dialogue preview performance setting process)
85(A) is a flowchart showing the dialogue preview effect setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 83. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue preview effect setting process is terminated. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach without shortening, a normal reach, or a super reach (step 006SGS331; N), the effect pattern and whether to execute the dialogue preview effect are determined according to the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview effect is determined not to be executed 70% of the time, and the dialogue preview effect is executed using presentation pattern A 30% of the time. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the dialogue preview effect is executed using presentation pattern A 35% of the time, and the dialogue preview effect is executed using presentation pattern B 5% of the time. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the dialogue preview effect is executed using presentation pattern A 10% of the time, the dialogue preview effect is executed using presentation pattern B 20% of the time, and the dialogue preview effect is executed using presentation pattern C 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the dialogue preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 10%, the dialogue preview effect will be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 5%, the dialogue preview effect will be executed in performance pattern B at a rate of 10%, and the dialogue preview effect will be executed in performance pattern C at a rate of 75%.

As shown in Figure 85 (C), presentation pattern A is a presentation pattern in which the line "Chance!?" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a cracking effect executed as part of a line preview effect, presentation pattern B is a presentation pattern in which the line "Hot!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a cracking effect executed as part of a line preview effect, and presentation pattern C is a presentation pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a cracking effect executed as part of a line preview effect.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), when a dialogue preview effect is executed during variable display, the probability of control to a jackpot gaming state is set higher than when the dialogue preview effect is not executed (not executed). Furthermore, when a dialogue preview effect is executed, the probability of control to a jackpot gaming state is set highest when the dialogue preview effect is executed in effect pattern C, and the probability of control to a jackpot gaming state is set lowest when the dialogue preview effect is executed in effect pattern A (jackpot expectation level depending on whether or not the dialogue preview effect is executed and the effect pattern: effect pattern C > effect pattern B > effect pattern A > not executed).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in Figure 83 will be explained. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7. If the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7, the start winning time receive command buffer 006SG194A is referenced.

When the game is in normal mode, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, in other words, if there is no reserved memory for a jackpot, as shown in Figure 86 (A), the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will not be executed with a 60% probability, and the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will be executed with a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed with a failure pattern, and the variable display change will be executed with a failure pattern). A failure pattern of background change performance B is executed in 30% of cases, and a change of the background image and a success pattern of the background change performance (a success pattern of background change performance A is executed in 10% of cases when the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, and a success pattern of background change performance B is executed in 10% of cases). Additionally, when the game state is in the time-saving state/probable win state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, in other words, if there is no reserved memory for a jackpot, the system will determine with a 50% probability that the background image will not change and that the background change effect will not be executed, with a 45% probability that the background image will not change and that the background change effect will be executed in a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, the background change effect A will be executed in a failure pattern), and with a 5% probability that the background image will change and that the background change effect will be executed in a success pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, the background change effect A will be executed in a success pattern).

Also, when the game is in normal mode, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserved memory for a jackpot, as shown in Figure 86 (A), the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will not be executed with a probability of 30%, and the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will be executed with a failure pattern (if the variable display variation pattern is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed with a failure pattern, and the variable display The execution of a change in the background image and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the variable display variation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of a successful pattern of background change performance A; if the variable display variation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of a successful pattern of background change performance B) is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of a change in the background image and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the variable display variation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of a successful pattern of background change performance A; if the variable display variation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of a successful pattern of background change performance B) is determined at a rate of 70%. Furthermore, when the game state is in the time-saving/probability variable state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A, i.e., if there is a reserved memory indicating a jackpot, the game will not change the background image and will not perform the background change effect 20% of the time, will not change the background image and will perform the background change effect in a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, the background change effect will be performed in a failure pattern of background change effect A) 0% of the time, and will perform the background image and perform the background change effect in a success pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, the background change effect will be performed in a success pattern of background change effect A) 80% of the time. Thus, in this embodiment, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state when a background change effect is performed differs between the normal state and the time-saving/probability variable state, i.e., the jackpot expectation rate.

If it is decided to execute one of the background change effect patterns, the execution setting corresponding to that background change effect pattern is made, and the background change effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to that execution setting. Furthermore, if it is decided to change the background image (if it is decided to execute the background change effect in a successful pattern), the background image change setting is made. The background image change can be executed in the background display update processing (step S79) shown in Figure 80.

(Reach suggestion effect setting process)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006SGS280) shown in Fig. 83 will be described. In the reach suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3. If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, it determines whether or not to execute a reach suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display.

For example, as shown in Figure 86 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the reach suggestion effect is not executed 80% of the time, and the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern 20% of the time. Furthermore, when the variation pattern of the variable display is a reach variation pattern, the reach suggestion effect is not executed 30% of the time, and the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern 70% of the time. In other words, in this embodiment, when a reach suggestion effect is executed, a reach (a normal reach or super reach reach effect) is executed with a higher probability than when a reach suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, when a reach suggestion effect is executed, the player is notified that the reach will not be achieved because the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern, while the player is notified that the reach will be achieved because the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern.

If it is decided to execute one of the reach suggestion effect patterns, the execution setting is made according to the effect pattern of that reach suggestion effect, and the reach suggestion effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to that execution setting.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) shown in Fig. 83 will be described. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7. If the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7, it determines whether to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect according to the change display result of the variable display.

For example, when the game is in normal mode, as shown in Figure 86 (C), if the variable display result is a miss, there is a 65% chance that the cut-in effect will not be performed, a 30% chance that the cut-in effect will be performed using presentation pattern X, and a 5% chance that the cut-in effect will be performed using presentation pattern Y. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 10% chance that the cut-in effect will not be performed, a 20% chance that the cut-in effect will be performed using presentation pattern X, and a 70% chance that the cut-in effect will be performed using presentation pattern Y.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a cut-in effect is executed, the game is set to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when a cut-in effect is not executed. Furthermore, when a cut-in effect is executed, the game is set to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state at a higher rate when the cut-in effect is executed with effect pattern Y than when the cut-in effect is executed with effect pattern X (whether or not a cut-in effect is executed and the expected jackpot probability of an effect pattern: effect pattern Y > effect pattern X > no cut-in effect). Also, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state/probability variable state, if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in effect is determined not to be executed 70% of the time, the cut-in effect with effect pattern X is determined 30% of the time, and the cut-in effect with effect pattern Y is determined 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the cut-in effect with effect pattern X is determined 15% of the time, and the cut-in effect with effect pattern Y is determined 75% of the time. In this embodiment, the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state when a cut-in effect is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation rate, differs between the normal state and the time-saving/probability variable state.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect is an effect that displays different images depending on the effect pattern (for example, an image of the letters "Hot!!" or an image of the letters "Chance!"), and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state varies depending on which image is displayed (which effect pattern is executed) (in this embodiment, effect pattern X is an effect pattern that displays an image of the letters "Chance!", and effect pattern Y is an effect pattern that displays an image of the letters "Hot!!").

If it is decided to execute one of the cut-in effect patterns, the execution setting corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is made, and the cut-in effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect is illustrated as an effect accompanied by a coin cracking effect (see Figures 88 and 112). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Cut-in effect patterns may include both coin cracking effects and those without. For example, effect pattern Y, which indicates a high probability of winning, may be an effect pattern accompanied by a coin cracking effect, and effect pattern X, which indicates a low probability of winning, may be an effect pattern without a coin cracking effect. Furthermore, when effect pattern X is set as an effect pattern without a coin cracking effect, the display mode of the band-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 may be selected from multiple modes depending on the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be selected from blue, green, and red in different proportions depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss). This allows the player to focus on whether the cut-in effect includes a coin cracking effect. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect does not include a coin cracking effect, the player's attention may be drawn to the display mode of the image displayed.

(Explanation of the production)
As described above, in this embodiment, at the start of the variable display, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the cut-in effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the continuous break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the cut-in effect, multiple effects can be executed during the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 87 and 88, when the gaming state is normal, the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect can be executed. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 89, when the gaming state is time-saving or probability variable state, the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, background change effect A, weak development effect, strong development effect A, cut-in effect, and result notification effect can be executed. Note that the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, and cut-in effect may be made impossible to execute in normal state and may be set as effects that can only be executed in time-saving or probability variable state. In this case, the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, and cut-in effect are executed according to the determination ratios shown in Figures 84 (B) and 86 (C). This makes it possible to perform different types of crack effects in normal mode, time-saving mode, and special mode.

As shown in Figures 87 to 89, the first continuous breaking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 as the image to be broken, breaks is executed from the start of the variable display. A crack appears in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, and only the portion where the crack occurred breaks (the broken area is limited to a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The first continuous breaking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the breaking effect (a portion of the display area of the image display device 5 that is broken by the breaking effect) and the rest of the display area. Furthermore, while the first continuous break effect is an effect that may be executed in a variable display before the variable display that is the target of the pre-read, in a time-saving state or a probability variable state, it is an effect that may be executed multiple times while one variable display is being executed, and depending on the number of times it is executed, it is also an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

The second continuous breaking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks is executed from the start of the variable display. A crack appears in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of a movable object or the action of a character, and only the area where the crack occurred breaks (the broken area is limited to a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The second continuous breaking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the breaking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is broken by the breaking effect) and the rest of the display area. Furthermore, the second continuous breaking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of a pre-read target.

The dialogue preview effect is an effect in which an operation prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect, urging the player to operate push button 31B, and then, in response to the operation of push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks.This is an effect in which a crack appears in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurred breaks (the broken area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the line preview effect is an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area subject to the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the rest of the display area, and one of the lines "Chance!", "Hot!" or "Super Hot!" is displayed in the cracked area (the area subject to the cracking effect), with the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state varying depending on the line displayed (the displayed line suggests the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (expected jackpot probability)).

Background change effect A is an effect that can change the background image by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 and executing a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. Background change effect A can be executed in a success pattern in which a character's action causes a crack to appear in the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to break, changing the background image, or in a failure pattern in which no character appears and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (glass plate image 006SG301A does not break), so the background image does not change.

Background change effect B is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, thereby changing the background image. Background change effect B may be executed in a success pattern where two stages of cracks appear in glass plate image 006SG301, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 to break, changing the background image; or in a failure pattern (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) where the first stage of cracks appears in glass plate image 006SG301 but the second stage of cracks does not occur, and glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, or where first and second stage cracks appear in glass plate image 006SG301 but glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, so the background image does not change.

The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which, when decorative symbols temporarily stop in a specific combination during variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby initiating the re-variable display of decorative symbols. When the movable body 32 moves, cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to break. In this embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed up to two times during one variable display, and the color of the pieces of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A in the first pseudo-continuous effect is different from the color of the pieces of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A in the second pseudo-continuous effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 67 and 68, the more pseudo consecutive effects executed during the variable display, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state). In other words, in the pseudo consecutive effects of this embodiment, the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the broken glass effect executed as part of the pseudo consecutive effects can suggest to the player the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (the likelihood of a jackpot).

The reach suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the achievement of a reach during variable display, and may result in a reach being achieved when a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and a breaking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. The reach suggestion effect may be executed in a success pattern in which a character's action causes a crack to appear in the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to break, thereby achieving a reach; or in a failure pattern in which a crack is caused by the character's action but the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (glass plate image 006SG301A does not break), resulting in no reach being achieved.

The weak development effect occurs after a normal reach effect, in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. This effect notifies the player of a transition to a Super Reach α reach effect if the game is in a normal state, and notifies the player of a transition to a Super Reach γ reach effect if the game is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state. The weak development effect is also an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being generated by the action of a character.

When the gaming state is normal, the strong development effect A is an effect that notifies a transition to a Super Reach β reach effect after the reach effect of Super Reach α by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 and executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32.When the gaming state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the strong development effect A is an effect that notifies a transition to a Super Reach δ reach effect after the reach effect of Super Reach α by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 and executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32.

Strong development effect B is also an effect in which cracks occur without any character action, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 to break. During the reach effect of Super Reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby announcing the transition to the reach effect of Super Reach β. This is an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks occurring, regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of a character.

The cut-in effect is an effect in which an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate push button 31B is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect, and then, in response to the operation of push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. This is an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks occurring due to the movement of a movable object or the action of a character. In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, different cut-in images are displayed depending on the effect pattern, and the probability of control into the jackpot game state varies depending on the displayed cut-in image (the displayed cut-in image suggests the probability of control into the jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability)).

The result notification effect is an effect in which an operation prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect, urging the player to operate the push button 31B, and then in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby notifying the player that the game has been controlled to a jackpot game state. The result notification effect may be executed in a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 after cracks have occurred due to the movement of the movable body breaks, indicating that the game has entered a jackpot state; or in a failure pattern in which the movable body does not move, the glass plate image 006SG301 does not crack, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break), indicating that the game has not entered a jackpot state, i.e., that the variable display result is a miss. In this embodiment, the result notification effect may exceptionally be executed in the variable display of PA1-6 or PB1-5, which are non-reach jackpot or non-reach miss variable patterns, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state (see FIG. 93).

(Performance timing for each variation pattern)
Next, we will explain the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect in this embodiment. First, we will explain the variable display when the game state is in the normal state. As shown in Figure 90 (A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-1, which is a variation pattern of no shortening and no reach miss, from the start timing of the variable display, the first continuous break effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the effect period.

As shown in Figure 90 (B), when variable display is executed in PA1-2 and PA1-3, which are variable patterns for shortened non-reach misses, the first consecutive break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in Figure 90 (C), when variable display is executed in PA2-1 or PB1-1, which are the variable patterns for normal reach jackpots and normal reach misses, a short time after the start of variable display, the following can be executed individually in this order without overlapping periods: dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and normal reach reach effect.

As shown in Figure 90 (D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-2 or PB1-2, which are the variable patterns for a Super Reach α jackpot or a Super Reach α miss, from the start of the variable display, the following can be executed individually without overlapping periods in the following order: second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo-consecutive effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, and Super Reach α reach effect. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach α reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the Super Reach α reach effect.

As shown in Figure 91 (A), when the variable display is executed in PA2-3 or PB1-3, which are the variable patterns for a Super Reach β jackpot or a Super Reach β miss, from the start of the variable display, the following can be executed individually without overlapping periods in the following order: second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, Super Reach α reach effect, strong development effect A, and Super Reach β reach effect. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In particular, the characters displayed in background change effect A begin to be displayed after the dialogue displayed in the dialogue preview effect (display of the broken area of the display area of the image display device 5) has gone invisible. This means that a new breaking effect will not occur when a breaking effect has already occurred, preventing the player's attention from being divided among multiple breaking effects, thereby preventing a decrease in the effectiveness of each breaking effect.

As shown in Figure 91 (B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-4 or PB1-4, which are the variable patterns for a Super Reach β jackpot or a Super Reach β miss, the following can be executed individually from the start of the variable display, in the order of the second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo consecutive effect, second pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, Super Reach α reach effect, strong development effect B, and Super Reach β reach effect, without any overlap in the display periods. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 90 to 92, an example is shown in which the variable display in which the background change effect B is executed and the variable display in which the dialogue preview effect is executed are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect may be executable within the same variable display. Furthermore, in this case in which the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect are executable within the same variable display, when it is decided to execute the background change effect B, the execution periods of the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect may not overlap. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a player from mistaking the execution of the crack effect as background change effect B for that being executed, for example, by executing a crack effect as a dialogue preview effect while a crack is occurring as background change effect B, in other words, to prevent the player from mistaking that the background image has changed.

Next, we will explain the variable display when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state. As shown in Figures 92(A) and 92(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach miss variable pattern, if it is decided to execute a continuous break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss or non-reach jackpot variable patterns, the first continuous break effect can be executed from the start of the variable display. If it is decided to execute a background change effect as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a super reach delta jackpot variable pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start of the variable display.

Furthermore, targeting the variable display of PB1-5, which is a variable pattern for non-reach jackpots, a prediction preview effect may be executed in which cracks gradually expand in the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display prior to the variable display, and a crack effect may be executed at the start of the variable display of PB1-5, displaying a jackpot symbol (a so-called instant win effect, special consecutive crack effect). Furthermore, since this effect is an instant win effect, the moving speed of the fragments displayed as the crack effect may be faster than the fragments displayed as other crack effects.

As shown in Figures 92 (C) and 92 (D), when variable display is executed for PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variable pattern, if it has been decided to execute a continuous break effect for PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss or non-reach jackpot variable patterns, the first continuous break effect can be executed twice individually from the start of the variable display, and if it has been decided to execute a background change effect as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a super reach delta jackpot variable pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start of the variable display.

Also, as shown in Figure 93 (A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variable pattern, if it is the target of the continuous break effect, or if the execution of the background change effect has not been decided as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a super reach delta jackpot variable pattern, or when the variable display is executed in PB1-5, which is a non-reach jackpot variable pattern, the first continuous break effect is executed three times individually from the start timing of the variable display, and then a result notification effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 93 (B), when variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variable pattern for a normal reach miss, no effects are executed except for the variable display of decorative symbols from the start timing of the variable display until the reach timing, and only the reach effects of the normal reach are executed from the reach timing.

As shown in Figure 93 (C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-6 or PB1-6, which are the variable patterns for a Super Reach γ jackpot or a Super Reach γ miss, no effects are executed except for the variable display of decorative symbols from the start timing of the variable display until the reach timing, and from the reach timing, the normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, and Super Reach γ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping with each other in the order of their respective effect periods. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the Super Reach γ reach effect.

As shown in Figure 93 (D), when variable display is executed in PA2-7 or PB1-7, which are the variable patterns for a Super Reach δ jackpot or a Super Reach δ miss, background change effect A can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach timing. Furthermore, from the reach timing, the normal reach reach effect, strong development effect A, and Super Reach δ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping in their respective performance periods. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach δ reach effect, a cut-in effect and a result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach δ reach effect.

(Super Reach α performance flow)
Next, the flow of effects in Super Reach α will be explained based on Figures 94 to 96. Figure 94 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in Super Reach α. Figure 95 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in Super Reach α. Figure 96 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in Super Reach α.

As shown in Figure 94 (A1), in the normal state (low probability, low base state), when the variable display of symbols based on the Super Reach α variable pattern begins, a first background image (e.g., an image depicting a daytime cityscape) is displayed as the background image, and variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. A predetermined time has passed since the variable display began, and a second continuous cracking effect begins. Specifically, when the second continuous cracking effect begins, a cracking precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a crack appears in part of the cracking precursor image, causing the cracking precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (see Figure 94 (A2)). A portion of the target image to be cracked, which replaces the cracking precursor image, cracks, and a cracking effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. Afterwards, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially broken area (specific range) of the target image that replaces the break precursor image, and the type of character image displayed suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see Figure 94 (A3)). After the second consecutive break effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect will begin. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the dialogue preview effect begins, an operation prompt image that encourages the operation of push button 31B will be displayed (see Figure 94 (A4)). The operation prompt image is composed of a button image that resembles push button 31B, a text image that reads "PRESS!!", an indicator image that indicates the valid operation period, and an effect image.

Next, when push button 31B is operated, or when the valid operation period ends without push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (see Figure 94 (A5)), a part of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image breaks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect starts. After that, a text image reading "Chance!?" is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image, and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot (see Figure 94 (A6)). After the dialogue preview effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the dialogue preview effect ended, background change effect A begins. Specifically, after an effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A7)), if a character's appearance has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see FIG. 94 (A8)). Next, a breakage precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the character image's movement (e.g., the character's kicking motion). A crack appears in part of the breakage precursor image, causing it to appear cracked (see FIG. 94 (A9)). After that, the entire target image that replaces the breakage precursor image breaks, resulting in multiple fragments scattering (see FIG. 94 (A10)). A whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect begins. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image (e.g., a special zone image depicting a wilderness landscape) different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 94 (A11)). After background change performance A ends, the variable display will be executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect begins. Specifically, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 94 (A12)). Next, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the character image's action (for example, the character hitting the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a gavel), and a crack appears on the left side of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a first crack pattern (see FIG. 94 (A13)). Then, a crack appears on the right side of the crack precursor image in response to the character image's action (for example, the character hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a gavel), causing the crack precursor image to change from the first crack pattern to a second crack pattern (see FIG. 94 (A14)). Furthermore, in response to the character image's action (for example, the character hitting the area corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C with a gavel) (see FIG. 94 (A15)), if a crack has been determined, the entire crack target image replacing the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 94 (A16)).

Furthermore, after the cracking effect begins, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, decorative symbols of the same number are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N reach effect begins.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, the weak development effect begins. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A17)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the character image's movement (e.g., the character moving toward the front of the display screen to punch a glass plate) (see FIG. 95 (A18)). A breakage effect is executed in which the entire target image that replaces the breakage precursor image breaks without displaying any cracks in a portion of the breakage precursor image, resulting in multiple fragmented images scattering (see FIG. 95 (A19)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect begins. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect A (e.g., a bowling match between a friendly character and an enemy character) begins (see FIG. 95 (A20) to (A22)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach effect, the strong development effect A begins. Specifically, after a development symbol with the word "development" displayed is temporarily displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 95 (A23)), a breakage precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (e.g., the movable body 32 falls from its origin position at the top of the display screen to a performance position overlapping the approximate center of the display screen). A breakage effect is then executed in which the entire target image that replaces the breakage precursor image breaks without displaying any cracks in any part of the breakage precursor image, resulting in multiple fragmented images scattering (see FIG. 95 (A24)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a reach title image is displayed, and a strong S reach effect (e.g., a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see FIG. 95 (A25) to (A27)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the Strong S Reach effect, a cut-in effect begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the start of the Strong S Reach effect, an operation prompting image is displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B (see FIG. 95 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a cracking effect is executed in which the entire target image that replaces the crack precursor image cracks without displaying any cracks in any part of the crack precursor image, resulting in multiple fragmented images scattering. Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. Then, a text image reading "HEAT!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot (see FIG. 95 (A29)). After the cut-in effect ends, the Strong S Reach effect is executed again.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the cut-in effect ended, the result notification effect will begin. Specifically, first, an image of an ally character delivering a final blow is displayed (see Figure 96 (A30)), after which the ally character's movements are displayed in slow motion and the image fades out (see Figure 96 (A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see Figure 96 (A32)), and then a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a predetermined presentation position between the origin position and the presentation position), and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (for example, a form in which a crack extends downward from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 96 (A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, a return-to-origin movement in which movable body 32 rises from a predetermined effect position above the display screen to the origin position), the entire target image that replaces the break precursor image breaks, and a break effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 96 (A34)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the break effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the confirmed decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character. Additionally, the background image is displayed as the fifth background image 006SG085 for a jackpot (for example, a rainbow-style image), the movable lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined light color (for example, rainbow), a predetermined sound effect is output, and after announcing that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state (see Figure 96 (A35)), the background image returns to the first background image and the fixed decorative symbols for the jackpot combination are displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 96 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss display result, an image of an enemy character's punch hitting an ally character is displayed (see Figure 96 (A37)), and then a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed without the movable body 32 moving, and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing it to be displayed in a cracked form (for example, a crack in the center of the display screen), and a gray image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 96 (A38)).

Next, after a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed (see Figure 96 (A39)), as the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the fixed decorative symbols of the non-jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in a stopped state, and it is announced that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character (Figure 96 (A40)). Furthermore, after it is announced that the game state will not be controlled to a jackpot, the background image returns to the first background image, and the fixed decorative symbols of the non-jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 96 (A41)).

(Super Reach β performance flow)
Next, the flow of effects in the Super Reach β will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in the Super Reach β. Figure 98 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in the Super Reach β.

As shown in Figure 97 (B1), in the normal state (low probability, low base state), when the variable display of symbols based on the Super Reach β variable pattern begins, a first background image is displayed as the background image, and variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. After a predetermined time has passed since the variable display began, background change effect B begins. Specifically, when background change effect B begins, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to appear cracked (see Figure 97 (B2)). Then, two crack display areas are displayed to the right of the crack precursor image, causing the crack pattern of the crack precursor image to gradually change (see Figure 97 (B3)). If a crack is determined, the entire crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 97 (B4)). Furthermore, after the cracking effect begins, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see Figure 97 (B5)).

After background change effect A ends, the variable display is executed again, and after a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 97 (B6)), a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, causing the variable display mode to become a reach mode (see Figure 97 (B7)).

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect will begin. Specifically, in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive symbol with the word "NEXT" displayed, indicating that the re-variable display will begin, will be displayed decelerating just before the stop display position (see Figure 97 (B8)).

Next, after the pseudo-consecutive symbols are temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 97 (B9)), a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed. A crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to appear cracked (see FIG. 97 (B10)). Then, in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (e.g., the movement of the movable body 32 dropping from the origin position at the top of the display screen to an effect position overlapping the approximate center of the display screen), the entire target image to be broken, replacing the crack precursor image, breaks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 97 (B11)). Furthermore, after the crack effect begins, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "x2" indicating the number of re-variable display times is displayed, and then the variable display resumes (see FIG. 97 (B12)-(B13)).

Also, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive pattern passes through the stop display position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R is displayed, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see Figure 97 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of a triple-pattern pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, with the word "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, is displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, decelerating just before the stop display position (see FIG. 97 (B14)). After the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped at the stop display position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 97 (B15)), a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to appear cracked (see FIG. 97 (B16)). Then, in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 dropping from the origin position above the display screen to an effect position overlapping approximately the center of the display screen), the entire area of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image breaks, resulting in a crack effect in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 97 (B17)). After the cracking effect begins, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "x3" indicating the number of times the variable display can be repeated is displayed, after which the variable display resumes (see Figure 98 (B18)-(B19)).

After the variable display is resumed for the second time in the case of a pseudo-consecutive double pattern, or for the third time in the case of a pseudo-consecutive triple pattern, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 98 (B20)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in an N reach (see Figure 98 (B21)), and the N reach performance begins.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, the weak development effect begins. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 98 (B22)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the character image's movement (e.g., the character moving toward the front of the display screen to punch a glass plate) (see FIG. 98 (B23)). A breakage effect is executed in which the entire target image that replaces the breakage precursor image breaks, without any cracks appearing in a portion of the breakage precursor image, and multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 98 (B24)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect begins. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect (e.g., a bowling match between a friendly character and an enemy character) begins (see FIG. 98 (B25)-(B26)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach effect, the strong development effect B begins. Specifically, when the strong development effect B begins, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack appears in a portion of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (see Figure 98 (B27)), the entire target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 98 (B28)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a development pattern with the word "development" displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C is temporarily displayed (see Figure 98 (B29)), after which a reach title image is displayed, and the strong S reach effect B (e.g., a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figure 98 (B30)). Furthermore, the Strong S Reach performance B is an S Reach performance with a higher expectation than the Strong S Reach performance A. Also, because the Strong S Reach performance B is an S Reach performance with a higher expectation than the Strong S Reach performance A, the cut-in performance described below is more likely to be executed in performance pattern Y. In other words, the Strong S Reach performance B is an performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 described below is more likely to be displayed than the Strong S Reach performance A.

Strong S Reach Presentation B is almost identical to Strong S Reach Presentation A of Super Reach α, with the only difference being the type of enemy character, etc., so we will omit a detailed explanation of the flow up to the end of the variable display.

(Examples of various effects)
Next, examples of the operation of the cracking effect in various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained based on Figures 99 to 115.

In the following explanation, we will explain an example of the expression used to indicate the display mode.

A "fade-out display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image increases over time, while a "fade-in display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image decreases over time.

An "animated display" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that creates movement by changing the visibility of at least a portion of the image compared to the image one frame earlier. Visibility can be changed by changing at least one of the position, size, color, or transparency of the displayed image compared to the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animated display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement, such as "moving display," "rotating display," "enlarged display," "reduced display," and "frame-in display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement but change the display mode, such as color tone, such as "fade-out display." In this embodiment, the number of still images (frames) displayed per second of moving image is 30, i.e., the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) in which the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous image, resulting in no change in the display mode.

As shown in Figures 99 to 115, the decorative symbols (for low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display section consisting of a circular number base section when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section, a character display section displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" on the number display section, an information base section that is rectangular when viewed from the front and an information display section consisting of information about the character (for example, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base section, and a roughly rectangular base display section that is displayed surrounding the number display section, character display section, and information display section (see Figure 58, etc.).

Although not described in detail, when the game state is in a high base state or in other presentation modes, decorative symbols with a display mode different from the decorative symbols for the low base state described above may be variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, while the variable display mode of the decorative symbols for the low base state is exemplified as a mode in which they are scrolled vertically from the top to the bottom of the display screen, other variable display modes may also be used, or the variable display mode may differ depending on the game state or presentation mode.

Display area 5S, located in the upper left corner of image display device 5, displays the first and second reserved memory counts and the small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbol consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. Note that in this embodiment, the numbers on the decorative symbol and the numbers on the small symbol correspond, but not all of the numbers on both symbols necessarily correspond. For example, the numbers on the small symbol may be numbers "1" to "5," which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative symbol, or may be symbols or figures that are different from the numbers on the decorative symbol.

The special symbol pending memory display area 5U located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending display 006SG101 (see Figure 148) and second pending display (not shown) corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display area 5F located at the bottom of the screen displays the active display 006SG103 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. Note that the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all presentation modes.

<First consecutive break effect and second consecutive break effect>
Details of the operation example of the first and second consecutive break effects will be described with reference to Fig. 99 and Fig. 100. Fig. 99 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the first consecutive break effect. Fig. 100 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the second consecutive break effect.

As shown in Figure 99 (A), when the game state is normal, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative patterns was executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R and the second continuous cracking effect begins, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility which is lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out (see Figure 99 (B)). Furthermore, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability variable state, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols was executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the second continuous crack effect is initiated, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability variable state, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to appear cracked. Furthermore, the decorative symbols displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, causing the cracked appearance to be conspicuous.

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the area where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 disappears, and a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in the Layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks (the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state), creating a shattering effect in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 99(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A or the fragment images 006SG302, which are displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image drawing area. As time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making it possible to view the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 99(D)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ceases (see Figure 99(E)).

After that, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314, which are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A, are displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is completed (see Figure 99 (F)), and then the glass plate image 006SG301A, character image 006SG305, and background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see Figure 99 (G)). Here, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, the background effect image 006SG314 is displayed with second visibility in a predetermined range other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, and with first visibility, which is higher than second visibility, in the crack display area 006SG304 (specific range). In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the portion visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, as shown in Figure 100, the second continuous breaking effect is almost the same as the first continuous breaking effect except for the type of character that appears, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Note that in this embodiment, the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect are illustrated as being almost the same in terms of their operational examples, but the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect may be different in terms of their operational examples.

For example, the first and second consecutive breaking effects may use the same breaking pattern D, and the fragment image 006SG302 may move in the same manner in the X, Y, and Z directions, but the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins when the crack begins may be different, such as by displaying the crack on the right side in Figure 99(B) and the crack on the left side in Figure 100(B). This allows for differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first and second consecutive breaking effects.

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack may be displayed in a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301 corresponding to the crack (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate whether the first or second continuous breaking effect will be executed. The first and second continuous breaking effects may also have different breaking patterns. In particular, for the second continuous breaking effect, the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to draw more attention to the variable display.

Furthermore, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous cracking effect, and a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect, and both may be output together with the cracking sound when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voice may be output after the cracking sound has finished being output when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited.

<Dialogue preview performance>
Details of an example of the operation of the dialogue preview effect will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the dialogue preview effect.

As shown in Figure 101 (A), when the dialogue preview performance starts while the decorative pattern is being displayed variably in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, an operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 (see Figure 101 (B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is hidden, and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to appear cracked. Additionally, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with second visibility, which is lower than first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out (see Figure 101 (C)).

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the area where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in the Layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, causing multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, to scatter across the Layer 5 image drawing area. A whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks (see Figure 101(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A or the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image drawing area. As time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making it possible to see the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 (see Figure 101(E)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see Figure 101(F)).

After that, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished, the Layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301A displays the text image 006SG306 saying "Chance!?" indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, along with the dialogue background image 006SG087 (see Figure 101 (F)). Here, the dialogue background image 006SG087 and text image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with the first visibility, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the area of the glass plate image 006SG301 other than the crack display area 006SG304 is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility. In other words, the difference in visibility between the uncracked area and the portion visible through the cracked area makes it easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the dialogue background image 006SG087, and the text image 006SG306 are hidden (see Figure 101 (H)).

101(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301 corresponding to the crack (e.g., a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate which of the dialogue image 006SG306 will be displayed: "Chance!?", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!". The crack pattern may also be varied depending on the type of dialogue (e.g., the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed; when "Super Hot!" is displayed, the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention). A common crack pattern may be used, but the position of the crack (e.g., closer to the center as the expectation level increases) or the range of the crack (e.g., wider as the expectation level increases) may be varied. Additionally, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305, and either can be output together with a crackling sound when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voice can be output after the crackling sound has finished being output when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crackling sound can be limited.

<Background change effect A>
Details of an operation example of background change presentation A will be described with reference to Fig. 102 and Fig. 103. Fig. 102 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change presentation A. Fig. 103 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change presentation A.

As shown in Figure 102 (A), when the game is in the normal state, when background change effect A is started while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and after gradually enlarging (see Figures 102 (B) and (C)), effect image 006SG320 is faded out and character image 006SG305 is displayed (see Figure 102 (D)). Additionally, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability variable state, if background change effect A is initiated while the decorative symbols are being displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the 6th background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability variable state, and after gradually enlarging, effect image 006SG320 is faded out and character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Note that the effect image 006SG320 displayed in Figure 102(B) is a presentation that teases whether or not the character image 006SG305 will be displayed in Figure 102(D). In the case of a successful pattern, the display will transition to Figure 102(C), and in the case of a failed pattern, the display will not transition to Figure 102(C), and the effect image 006SG320 will be displayed in a reduced size and then disappear, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 will not be displayed.

Next, when the game state is normal, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a precursor image to a crack in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and then, as the character image 006SG305 kicks towards the front, a crack is displayed spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a pre-crack state (see Figure 102 (E)), after which the crack gradually spreads radially and changes into a crack state (see Figure 102 (F)). Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility which is lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out. Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probable change state, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image, and then, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the front, cracks are displayed spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, and after the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state, the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state. Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with second visibility, which is lower than first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently.

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the area where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, when the game is in the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 disappears, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is shattered entirely, resulting in a shattering effect in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered across the Layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 102 (G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A or the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIGS. 102(H) and 103(I)). After the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 103(J)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 103(K)). In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 appears natural, and the background change appears natural. Furthermore, when the game state is in the time-saving state/probability variable state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is shattered in its entirety, resulting in a shattering effect in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), making it difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. As the transparency gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is the chance background image for the time-saving mode/probability bonus mode, increases. When the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and then the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. In this way, by executing a cracking effect when the background image changes from the sixth background image to the seventh background image, the change from the sixth background image to the seventh background image appears natural, allowing the background change to appear natural.

Furthermore, for example, a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed as a background image than the second background image 006SG082 may be displayed, and the movement mode of the character image 006SG305 (action such as punching or kicking) may suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed. Furthermore, by making it possible to display a character other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed.

<Background change effect B>
An example of the operation of background change presentation B will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104 is a diagram showing the details of an example of the operation of background change presentation B.

As shown in Figure 104(A), when background change effect B begins while the decorative pattern is being displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081. A crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to appear cracked (see Figure 104(B)). Subsequently, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, causing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 to change gradually (see Figure 104(C)).

In this way, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked state, but are displayed with second visibility, which is lower than first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, so that the cracked state is displayed prominently.

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the area where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 104(C), the first background image 006SG081, which is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with second visibility in areas other than each crack display area 006SG324, but is displayed with first visibility, which is higher than second visibility, in each crack display area 006SG324. In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the part visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in the Layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters entirely, resulting in a shattering effect in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the Layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 104(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A or the fragment images 006SG302, which are displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of fragment image 006SG302 and second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 104(E)). Then, after the display of whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 104(F)), the display of fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 104(G)). In this way, by executing a cracking effect when the background image changes from first background image 006SG081 to second background image 006SG082, the change from first background image 006SG081 to second background image 006SG082 can be made to appear natural, and the background change can be made to appear natural.

Also, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks (e.g., a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image can indicate the expected development of the effect. Specifically, if the display color of the effect image is blue, it is likely to end in the first stage (see FIG. 104(B)), and if the display color of the effect image is green, it is likely to end in the second stage (see FIG. 104(C)). Preferably, red is most likely to develop into a cracked effect compared to blue or green. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 121(B), if the effect ends in the first stage in failure pattern 1, the transparency gradually increases and the image disappears (fade-out display) 1500 ms after the start of background change effect B. As shown in FIG. 121(C), if the effect ends in the second stage in failure pattern 2, the transparency gradually increases and the image disappears 3000 ms after the start of background change effect B.

Furthermore, while background change effect B is being executed, it is possible to restrict change effects for active and pending displays, which are images displayed in layer image drawing areas higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, while not restricting effects using images (such as mini character images) displayed in layer image drawing areas lower than the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the cracking effect.

<Pseudo consecutive performance>
Details of an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive effects will be described with reference to Fig. 105. Fig. 105 is a diagram showing details of a part of an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive effects.

As shown in Figure 105 (A), after the pseudo-consecutive performance has begun, when the pseudo-consecutive pattern with the word "NEXT" displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the re-variable display will begin, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopped display position, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. Additionally, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with second visibility, which is lower than first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out (see Figure 105 (B)).

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the area where the crack is displayed, and then frames out and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to the performance position, and in response to this action, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 105 (C)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance begins (see Figure 105 (D)). Additionally, as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, creating a shattering effect in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the layer 5 image drawing area.

The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see Figure 105 (E)). Then, when the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, an action effect image 006SG321 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area, spreading out from the movable body 32 to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the effect position, and a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, spreading out from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (see Figures 105 (F) and (G)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 has ended, the movable body 32 begins to move from the effect position toward the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figure 105 (G)), and then stops at the effect position after all fragment images 006SG302 are no longer displayed, completing the return operation to the origin position (see Figure 105 (H)).

In addition, the return operation of the movable body 32 from the effect position to the origin position may be started after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 has finished and then the display of the background effect image 006SG322 has finished.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and the re-variable display begins during the pseudo consecutive performance, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed during the first variable display may be blue, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed during the second variable display may be green, and the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed during the third variable display may be red. Furthermore, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be different, for example, by gradually increasing in size each time the re-variable display is performed.

In this case, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of times the re-variable display is performed, but it is preferable that the crack pattern be common. In this way, by standardizing the crack pattern in a gaming machine that performs a variety of crack effects, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo-consecutive effect has been performed. Furthermore, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common between the first, second, and third re-variable displays, the display manner of the crack pattern may be different between the first, second, and third re-variable displays, for example, by varying the size of the fragment image 006SG302, the number of displayed fragment images 006SG302, or the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302.

<Reach suggestion effect>
Details of an operation example of a reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to Fig. 106 and Fig. 107. Fig. 106 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a reach suggestion effect. Fig. 107 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a reach suggestion effect.

As shown in Figure 106 (A), when the reach suggestion effect is initiated while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 106 (B)), and then character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 106 (C)). Next, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the Layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and as the character image 006SG305 strikes the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a mallet, a crack appears on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in the first crack mode, and an action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the Layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 106 (D)).

Next, in response to the action of character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a mallet, a crack appears on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to change to a second cracked state, and an action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 106 (E)).

Furthermore, in response to the action of character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C with a mallet (see Figure 106 (F)), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 106 (G)), and then the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 106 (H)).

Also, as shown in Figures 106 (D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, a small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the area where the crack is displayed, and then frames out and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 106 (H), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks across its entirety, resulting in a shattering effect in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter across the layer 5 image drawing area. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). At the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image drawing area. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern, fragment image 006SG302, and second background image 006SG082 increases (see Figure 107(I)). Finally, when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged and highlighted (see Figure 107(J)). Then, the decorative patterns are reduced in size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 107(K)).

In the various effects that accompany a cracking effect in this embodiment, for example, as shown in the flow of Figures 107(J) to 107(K), the effect progresses after the fragment image 006SG302 has completely cleared the display area of the image display device 5 and is no longer displayed during the cracking effect (for example, progressing from a reach suggestion effect that accompanies a cracking effect to a reach effect that does not accompany a cracking effect).

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that highlights the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack (e.g., a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image can indicate the likelihood of a reach developing. Specifically, if the effect image is displayed in blue and red, it would be better if the effect image is displayed in red, making it more likely to result in a reach than when it is displayed in blue.

In addition, in the case of a failure pattern, after a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in response to the action of character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C with a mallet (see Figures 106 (G) and (H)), a character image 006SG305 looking disappointed is displayed in the area corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C, after which the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 are hidden, the failure pattern stops, and the variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
Details of an operation example of the weak development effect will be described with reference to Fig. 108. Fig. 108 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the weak development effect.

As shown in Figure 108 (A), whether the game is in the normal state or the time-saving/probable bonus state, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R reaches a reach state and the weak development effect begins, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, and a character image 006SG305 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 6 image drawing area above it (see Figure 108 (B)). After that, the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, and then it is displayed in slow motion while expanding as if it is moving toward the front of the display screen (see Figure 108 (C)). Furthermore, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are moved to the upper right-hand position of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size.

Next, when the game is in normal play mode, a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the Layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image. Instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A shatters, resulting in multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scattering across the Layer 5 image drawing area. After the shattering effect begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 108 (D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A or the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image drawing area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, increasing the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 108(E)). After the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 51(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see FIG. 108(G)). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect (see FIG. 108(H)). Furthermore, when the game state is in the time-saving/probability variable state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A does not appear cracked, but the entire glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatters in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the break effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), making it difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. As time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, increasing the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305. After the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect. Note that in Figures 117 and 130 described below, the display mode of fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is shown as non-transparent, but this is the final display mode of fragment image 006SG302. In Figures 136 (B1) to (B3) described below, fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is displayed in a transparent mode with transparency (e.g., transparency of 70% or more), and then in Figures 136 (B4) and (B5) in a non-transparent mode with no transparency (e.g., transparency of less than 10%). In other words, at the first timing corresponding to Figure 136 (B3), fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent mode, and at the second timing corresponding to Figure 136 (B4), fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a non-transparent mode.

In this way, by executing a crack effect when the N reach effect progresses to a weak S reach effect, the change from the N reach effect image to the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 can be made to look natural, making the change in effect appear natural.

<Strong Development A>
Details of an example of operation of the strong development effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is a diagram showing details of a part of an example of operation of the strong development effect A.

As shown in Figure 109 (A), in the weak S reach effect, a development symbol displaying the word "Development" is temporarily displayed, and when the strong development effect A begins, the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to the effect position. As this falling action begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in approximately the center of the layer 7 image drawing area, and the movable body 32 begins to fall (see Figure 109 (B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect begins.

In addition, as a preliminary effect before the breaking effect, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and when the movable body 32 moves to the effect position, a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the weak S reach effect image 006SG088.The glass plate image 006SG301A does not appear cracked, but the entire glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and a breaking effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter across the layer 5 image drawing area (see Figure 109 (C)).

The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). Since the transmittance remains at 0% until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed on layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 109(C)). As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see Figure 109(D)). Next, when the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, an action effect image 006SG325 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area, spreading out from the movable body 32 to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the effect position, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, spreading out from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (see Figure 109 (E)).

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and after the fragment image 006SG302 disappears, the movable body 32 begins to move from the performance position to the origin position (see Figure 109 (F)). Then, the return operation to the origin position ends, the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, and the strong S reach performance begins (see Figure 109 (G)).

<Strong Development Performance B>
Details of an operation example of the strong development effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 110 and Fig. 111. Fig. 110 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the strong development effect B. Fig. 111 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the strong development effect B.

As shown in Figure 110(A), when the strong development effect B starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the weak S reach effect image 006SG088, and cracks are displayed radiating from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to appear cracked (see Figure 110(B)). Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but with second visibility, which is lower than first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, causing the cracked appearance to be more noticeable.

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the area where the crack is displayed, and then frames out and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 110(C)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 110(D)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 110 (D), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks across its entirety, resulting in a shattering effect in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). At the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and fragment image 006SG302 increases (see Figure 110(E)). Next, the transmittance reaches 100%, ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. After the decorative pattern, which is a development pattern with the word "development" temporarily displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, is displayed (see Figure 110(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 110(G)).

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 110(H)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time, with the development symbols disappearing (see Figure 111(I)). Then, as the transparency gradually increases over time, the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach effect increases (see Figures 111(J) and (K)).

In this way, by executing a cracking effect when the weak S reach effect progresses to a strong S reach effect, it appears as if the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 has cracked and changed into the reach title image 006SG326, making the change in reach effect appear natural.

<Cut-in effects>
Details of an example of the operation of the cut-in effect will be described with reference to Fig. 112. Fig. 112 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the cut-in effect.

As shown in Figure 112 (A), when a cut-in effect begins a predetermined period of time after the start of the strong S reach effect, an operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084 for the strong S reach effect (see Figure 112 (B)).

Next, when push button 31B is operated (or when the valid operation period ends without push button 31B being operated), glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above fourth background image 006SG084. Instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A shatters, resulting in a shattering effect in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than small fragment image 006SG302A scatter across the layer 5 image drawing area. Additionally, operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed as if the button has been pressed, and operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, enlarging over time (see Figures 112 (C) and (D)).

In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken piece image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 112 (C)). Furthermore, because the operation prompt image 006SG310 and operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the Layer 8 image drawing area, which is higher than the whiteout image 006SG303, they are displayed while maintaining the same first visibility as when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed.

As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, making it possible to see fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 112(D)). Furthermore, while operation prompt image 006SG310 and operation effect image 006SG327 are hidden, the text image 006SG307 reading "Hot!!" becomes visible (see Figure 112(E)). After the transparency reaches 100%, the display of whiteout image 006SG303 ceases (see Figure 112(F)), and fragment image 006SG302 is no longer visible (see Figure 112(G)).

In this embodiment, both cut-in effect patterns X and Y are described as effect patterns that include a crack effect, but as a cut-in effect pattern, effect pattern Y, which has a high probability of winning, may be a chance effect pattern that includes a crack effect, and effect pattern X, which has a low probability of winning, may be an effect pattern that does not include a crack effect. In such a case, the effect pattern that does not include a crack effect may be such that a strip-shaped cut-in image (not shown) is displayed on the fourth background image 006SG084.

<Result notification effect (jackpot)>
Details of an operation example of the result notification effect (jackpot) will be explained based on Fig. 113 and Fig. 114. Fig. 113 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. Fig. 114 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 113 (A), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the cut-in effect ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect begins. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the image fades out in slow motion, after which a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 113 (B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an object image 006SG308 is displayed in which an attack from an ally character hits an enemy character (see Figure 113 (C)), and then the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to a predetermined performance position, and in response to this falling action, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the object image 006SG308 as a crack precursor image, and cracks are displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 extending downward from the movable body 32, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. Furthermore, object image 006SG308, which is displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with first visibility when glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but is displayed with second visibility, which is lower than first visibility, when glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern more noticeable (see Figure 113 (D)).

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, a small fragment image 006SG302A appears to fall downward from the area where the crack is displayed, and then disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 begins to be displayed in a position near the bottom of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 113 (E)). As the movable body 32 begins its return-to-origin operation of rising from the predetermined performance position to the origin position, the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads downward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 113 (F)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113 (F), at the timing when the return-to-origin operation of the movable body 32 is initiated and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is entirely shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect is initiated. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the Layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it makes it difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and fragment image 006SG302 becomes better (see Figure 113 (G)).

Next, the transparency reaches 100%, ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, and the fifth background image 006SG085 and the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination are displayed (see Figure 113 (H)). After this, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, an announcement is made that the game is in a jackpot gaming state (see Figure 114 (I)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is displayed in a static state (see Figure 114 (J)).

Furthermore, after the cracking effect begins in response to the start of the upward movement of the movable body 32 to return to the origin, the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases and the visible fragment image 006SG302 ends (becomes invisible), and the upward movement of the movable body 32 returning from the specified effect position to the origin position ends, allowing for early notification of a jackpot.

<Result notification (loss)>
Details of an operation example of the result notification effect (loss) will be described with reference to Fig. 115. Fig. 115 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a loss.

As shown in Figure 115(A), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the cut-in effect ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect begins. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and it fades out in slow motion, after which a whiteout image with 0% transparency (opaque) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 115(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a miss display result, the movable body 32 does not move and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen in the layer 7 image drawing area for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 115 (C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301 and character image 006SG305 displayed on layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area.

Then, in the Layer 4 image drawing area above the character image 006SG305, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to appear cracked. The character image 006SG305, displayed in the Layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, and the gray background image 006SG313, displayed in the Layer 1 image drawing area, are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but with second visibility, which is lower than first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the cracked appearance more noticeable (see Figure 115 (D)).

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the area where the crack is displayed, and then frames out and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in either the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Thus, although the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the cracked state is maintained and no cracking effect is performed on the glass plate image 006SG301, indicating that the game is not being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked state, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again across the entire Layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 115(E)). Then, after the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed (see Figure 115(F)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081 and the fixed decorative symbols for the non-jackpot combination are displayed (see Figure 115(G)).

(Production details)
Next, detailed explanations of each effect that can be executed in this embodiment will be provided. As shown in Figures 116, 118, 99, and 100, the first and second consecutive crack effects first display a first-stage crack in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms (first-stage crack display period). Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, causing the display of the fragment image 006SG302 for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, after the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than that during the whiteout display early period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the first and second continuous breaking effects of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 400 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is therefore unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 600 ms period including the later whiteout display period following the earlier whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, second-stage cracks are displayed around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the area targeted by the broken effect) for 3000 ms (second-stage crack display period). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the first and second continuous breaking effects are transparent, allowing the player to view other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, during the first and second consecutive cracking effects, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the crack display for 500 ms, which is the crack display period described above, and for 1000 ms from the time when glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the cracking effect (crack sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sounds and cracking effect sounds output are the same for the first and second consecutive cracking effects, but during the first consecutive cracking effect, a first character voice corresponding to the character in Figure 99(E) is output along with the cracking effect sound, and during the second consecutive cracking effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character in Figure 100(E) is output along with the cracking effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first and second consecutive cracking effects. Furthermore, the cracking sound is louder than the cracking sound and is easier for players to recognize, but the first character voice and second character voice are output at an even louder volume than the cracking sound and for a longer output period than the cracking sound, making them easier for players to recognize than the cracking sound.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, thereby emitting illumination that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and for the 800 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the timing when the late whiteout display period ends, the illumination data table for the break effect (whiteout 800 ms) is used, thereby emitting illumination that primarily consists of white light in a manner corresponding to the break effect. Furthermore, after the illumination corresponding to the break effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used again, thereby emitting illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). The light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 800 ms) is a data table that causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 400 ms, which corresponds to the early whiteout display period, and then emits white light at alternating high and low brightness for 400 ms, which corresponds to the later whiteout display period.

As shown in Figures 116, 119, and 101, the dialogue preview effect begins with an operation prompt image being displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms as an operation prompt effect, urging the player to operate the push button 31B (operation prompt effect execution period). When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation prompt effect execution, or when the operation prompt effect execution period ends, a first-stage crack is displayed for 500 ms from that timing (first-stage crack display period). Next, when the timing arrives for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, causing a fragment image 006SG302 to be displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 400 ms to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than that during the early whiteout display period is displayed for 400 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the dialogue preview presentation of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 400 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 600 ms following the early whiteout display period, including the late whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player, which is the fragment image 006SG302 visibility period.

Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, second-stage cracks are displayed for 5000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the area targeted by the broken effect). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the dialogue preview effect are transparent, allowing the player to view other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, during the dialogue preview performance, cracking sounds corresponding to the display of the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the first-stage crack display period described above (crack sound output period), and cracking sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cracked sound output period). The types of cracking sounds and cracking sound output are the same for the dialogue preview performance, the first continuous cracking effect, and the second continuous cracking effect, and during the dialogue preview performance, after the cracking sound is output (when the cracking sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of text image 006SG306 is output. This prevents the dialogue voice sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the cracking sound.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, thereby emitting light that does not primarily emit white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). For the 800 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the timing when the later whiteout display period ends, the illumination data table for the break effect (whiteout 800 ms) is used, thereby emitting light that primarily emits white light in a manner corresponding to the break effect. After the illumination corresponding to the break effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used again, thereby emitting light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081).

As shown in Figures 116, 120(A), 120(B), 102, and 103, the background change effect A for the successful pattern begins with a preliminary action in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (preliminary action period). From the end of the preliminary action (character action), a crack is displayed for 2000 ms (crack display period).

As shown in Figure 120(B), the 2000 ms crack display period is made up of a 1000 ms early crack display period and a 1000 ms late crack display period following the early crack display period. During the early crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed for 100 ms from the start of the early crack display period, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that had been displayed up until that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see Figure 103). Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2,500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than that displayed during the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in background change presentation A of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms period following the early whiteout display period, which includes the late whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

In addition, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during background change effect A in successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the background change effect A in the successful pattern, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start of the pre-crack display period described above (cracking sound output period), and a character voice corresponding to the character's action is output, and a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 2500 ms from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cracking effect sound output period). The cracking sound in the background change effect A is a sound exclusive to the background change effect A, and includes a sound effect indicating the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to a chance background image. During the 2500 ms output period, the sound effect indicating the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to a chance background image are output for 1000 ms, followed by a sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to a chance background image. While the output period for the cracking sound is set to 500 ms, it may be set to 2000 ms, corresponding to the crack display period, or a sound corresponding to the progression of the cracking may be output over the 2000 ms period. Additionally, an action effect sound is output over 100 ms, corresponding to the action effect display period, overlapping with the cracking sound. The operation effect sound is output at a louder volume than the crackling sound, and while the crackling sound is difficult to hear when the operation effect sound is output, the output period of the operation effect sound is shorter than that of the crackling sound, so the crackling sound can be heard after the operation effect sound is output.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table until the start of the crack display period, illumination is achieved that does not primarily emit white light in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). For the 2000 ms from the start of the crack display period to the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, illumination is achieved in a manner that corresponds to the display of a crack by using the crack display period illumination data table that primarily causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light. Furthermore, for the 1000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the end of the later whiteout display period, illumination is achieved that primarily emits white light in a manner that corresponds to the crack effect by using the crack effect illumination data table (whiteout 1000 ms). After the light emission corresponding to the break effect ends, the light emission data table for the chance background image is used to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). The light emission data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 500 ms corresponding to the early whiteout display period, and for 500 ms corresponding to the late whiteout display period, alternating between high and low brightness white light. While an example using a normal background image light emission data table during the early operation period has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The game effect lamp 9 may also be illuminated during the early operation period using a light emission data table for the early operation that primarily consists of green light corresponding to the characters shown in FIG. 102(D). In this case, until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in Fig. 102(D), but after the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. In this way, a difference is created between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect of the background change presentation A. Note that both the light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are light emission data tables that primarily emit white light, but whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) includes a blinking pattern that alternates between high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed without including a blinking pattern.

As shown in Figure 120 (C), in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-operation. In other words, in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed, so the cracking effect is not executed, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in Figures 102 (B) and (C), although a teasing effect is executed to indicate whether or not a character will be displayed, neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so the light emission data table for the normal background image is used as the light emission data table.

As shown in Figures 116, 121(A), and 104, the background change effect B for a successful pattern first displays a first-stage crack for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (first-stage crack display period). During the first-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms from the start of the first-stage crack display period.

Furthermore, from the timing when 1500 ms have elapsed during the first-stage crack display period, second-stage cracks are displayed over a wider area of the display area of the image display device 5 than during the first-stage crack display period for 1500 ms (second-stage crack display period). Furthermore, during the second-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms from the timing when the second-stage crack display period begins. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A during the first-stage crack display period and the small fragment image 006SG302A during the second-stage crack display period have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in Figure 130, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image, but because the parameter value for "gravity" is the same, they are both displayed frame-out downwards.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that had been displayed up until that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see Figure 104). Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1,250 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than that displayed during the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in background change presentation A of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 750 ms period following the early whiteout display period, which includes the late whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

In addition, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during background change effect B in successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the background change effect B in the successful pattern, a first-stage cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start of the first-stage crack display period (first-stage cracking sound output period), a second-stage cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start of the second-stage crack display period (second-stage cracking sound output period), and a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 150 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cracking effect sound output period). The cracking sound in background change effect B is a sound exclusive to background change effect B, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect announcing that the background image has switched to a chance background image. The sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, along with the sound effect announcing that the background image has switched to a chance background image, is output for 1000 ms of the 1250 ms output period, after which the sound effect announcing that the background image has switched to a chance background image is continuously output for 250 ms. The volume of the cracking sound in background change effect B is the loudest, and the first-stage cracking sound and the second-stage cracking sound may have the same volume, or the second-stage cracking sound may be louder than the first-stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, thereby emitting illumination that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). For the 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the timing when the later whiteout display period ends, the illumination data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used, thereby emitting illumination that primarily consists of white light in a manner corresponding to the break effect. After the illumination corresponding to the break effect ends, the illumination data table for the chance background image is used, thereby emitting illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082).

As shown in Figures 121 (B) and 121 (C), background change presentation B in failure pattern 1 is a presentation pattern in which the first stage crack is displayed for 1500 ms and a small fragment image corresponding to the first stage crack is displayed for 200 ms, but the second stage crack is not displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break; background change presentation B in failure pattern 2 is a presentation pattern in which the first stage crack is displayed for 3000 ms and a small fragment image is displayed for 200 ms, and from the time 1500 ms has elapsed during the first stage crack display period, the second stage crack is displayed for 1500 ms and a small fragment image corresponding to the second stage crack is displayed for 200 ms, but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In these failure patterns, background change effect B does not break the glass plate image 006SG301A, so the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed.

As shown in Figures 116, 122, and 105, the pseudo consecutive display first temporarily stops the "left" decorative pattern, the "right" decorative pattern, and the "center" decorative pattern in that order in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, from the timing when the pseudo consecutive display, which is the "center" decorative pattern, stops, a crack is displayed for 1,500 ms (crack display period). During this crack display period, as a preliminary operation, the moving body 32 performs a falling operation for 1,500 ms (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the moving body 32 is completed (1,500 ms has passed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. Note that the cracks during the crack display period of the pseudo consecutive display and the cracks during the crack display period of the background change display A are designed to appear differently. For example, the cracks in background change effect A are displayed in such a way that the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 progress in stages over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period, while the cracks in the pseudo-consecutive effect are displayed in such a way that the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in this embodiment of the pseudo-consecutive effect, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303 blocking the view. Meanwhile, during the latter 500 ms of the whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Furthermore, for 3000 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed along with the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the pseudo consecutive effects are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

For 3000 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the break effect (break effect sound output period). The break effect sound in the pseudo consecutive effects is a sound exclusive to the pseudo consecutive effects, and is composed of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32. During the 3000 ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is output along with the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 for 1000 ms, after which the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 is output continuously for 2000 ms. After that, after the output period for the break effect sound ends, background music corresponding to the normal background image or chance background image is output, resulting in a variety of sounds being output during the period in which the movable body 32 rises. Furthermore, at the end of the later whiteout display period, i.e., from the end of the display of fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rising period).

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table until the start of the crack display, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and for the 2000 ms from the start of the crack display to the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, illumination is primarily white in a manner corresponding to the crack display by using the crack display illumination data table. Then, for the 1000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the end of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white in a manner corresponding to the crack display by using the crack effect illumination data table (whiteout 1000 ms). After the illumination corresponding to the break effect has ended, illumination is performed for 2000 ms in a manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects have been executed, by using a pseudo consecutive effect illumination data table corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects have been executed. For example, when the first pseudo consecutive effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in green in response to the execution of the first pseudo consecutive effect, and when the second pseudo consecutive effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in red in response to the execution of the second pseudo consecutive effect. Then, after the illumination corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects have been executed has ended, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by again using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table. Note that both the light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are light emission data tables that primarily emit white light, but whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) includes a blinking pattern that alternates between high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed without including a blinking pattern.

As shown in Figures 120 and 122, the present embodiment illustrates an example in which the crack display period is different between background change effect A and pseudo consecutive effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the crack display period may be the same between background change effect A and pseudo consecutive effects.

As shown in Figures 116, 123 (A), 106 and 107, the reach indication performance for a successful pattern is as follows: first, as a preliminary operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, an image acting on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and an image acting on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in sequence over a period of 10,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the first stage operation, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L on the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 8000 ms (left crack display period), and further, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R on the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 4000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms. During the right crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R have different "strength" and "repetition" parameter values shown in Figure 130, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image, but because the "gravity" parameter value is the same, they are both displayed in a downward frame-out fashion.

When the first operation period ends due to a character acting on the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 during the first operation period, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break arrives, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that had been displayed up until that time is updated to a normal reach background image corresponding to the reach presentation of a normal reach. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, after the glass plate image 006SG301A shatters, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the fragment image 006SG302 from the player (the early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (the late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the reach suggestion effect of the successful pattern of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A shatters, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. Meanwhile, during the 1500 ms period following the early whiteout display period, including the late whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, from the end of the whiteout display later period, the decorative symbols are highlighted for 3000 ms to notify the player that they have reached a winning state, for example by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols (decorative symbol highlighting period).

In addition, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the reach suggestion effect in a successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the reach suggestion effect in a successful pattern, a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start of the above-mentioned left crack display period (left crack sound output period), and a first character voice corresponding to the character's first action action is output, and a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start of the above-mentioned right crack display period (right crack sound output period), and a second character voice corresponding to the character's second action action is output, and a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 2000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (crack effect sound output period). The cracking sound in the reach suggestion effect (success pattern) is a sound exclusive to the reach suggestion effect, and includes the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect of highlighting the decorative symbols, such as by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols, to notify the player that a reach has been reached. The sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect of highlighting are output for 1000 ms during the 3000 ms output period, followed by the sound effect of highlighting for 2000 ms. After the cracking sound output period ends, background music corresponding to the normal reach background image is output. When a motion effect corresponding to a character's action is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the motion effect is output. This sound effect is used both when the motion effect is displayed around the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table is used, thereby emitting illumination that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). For the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end of the later whiteout display period, the illumination data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used, thereby emitting illumination that primarily consists of white light in a manner corresponding to the break effect. After the illumination corresponding to the break effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal reach background image is used, thereby emitting illumination that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image.

As shown in Figure 123 (B), the reach suggestion effect in a failure pattern begins with a preliminary operation in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, an image of the character acting on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and an image of the character acting on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed in sequence for 14,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preliminary operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 12,000 ms (left crack display period), and further, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, a crack is displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 8,000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms. During the right crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302 in failure patterns are displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment images 006SG302 in success patterns, so the player cannot tell whether it is a success pattern or a failure pattern by looking at the speed at which the small fragment images 006SG302 scatter or the size and number of each small fragment image, and so can favorably infer whether a normal reach will be executed or not.

Furthermore, in the reach suggestion effect for a failure pattern, a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start of the left crack display period described above (left crack sound output period), and a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start of the right crack display period described above (right crack sound output period). Furthermore, starting from the same timing as the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks in the reach suggestion effect for a success pattern (the timing when 10,000 has elapsed since the start of the reach suggestion effect for a failure pattern), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1,000 ms (whiteout display period). The whiteout display period is a period during which the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 makes other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible to the player. Furthermore, when an action effect corresponding to a character's action is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

In the reach suggestion effect for the failure pattern, until the start of the whiteout display period, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or chance background image (second background image 006SG082) using the illumination data table for the normal background image or chance background image. Then, during the whiteout display period, illumination is performed primarily in white in a manner corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the whiteout illumination data table. Then, from the end of the whiteout display period, illumination is performed primarily in white in a manner corresponding to the fact that a reach will not be achieved (the reach suggestion effect is a failure pattern) using the failure notification illumination data table. The illumination corresponding to the fact that a reach will not be achieved (the reach suggestion effect is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display stops. The light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms), the whiteout light emission data table, and the failure notification light emission data table are all light emission data tables that primarily emit white light, but while the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness white light emission and low-brightness white light emission, the white light emission based on the whiteout light emission data table and the failure notification light emission data table is executed without a flashing pattern. Also, while the game effect lamp 9 is emitting light based on the failure notification light emission data table (until the variable display ends when the variable display stops), no effect sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 117, 124, and 108, the weak development effect begins with a preliminary operation in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed for 4000 ms (preliminary operation period). Note that although the preliminary operation period is set to 4000 ms, a separate preliminary operation period (2000 ms) pattern may be set, and when indicating to the player that there is a high likelihood of a jackpot, it may be determined that the weak development effect will be executed more frequently using the preliminary operation period (2000 ms) pattern than the preliminary operation period (4000 ms) pattern.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal reach background image corresponding to the normal reach effect that had been displayed up until that point is updated to a weak development effect background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development effect, and the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaced the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, displaying the fragment image 006SG302 for 3,500 ms (fragment image display period). After the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 3000 ms period including the late whiteout display period following the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player, and the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the weak development effect background image that has been displayed up until that time and corresponds to the weak development effect is updated to the Super Reach α background image that corresponds to the reach effect of Super Reach α.

Fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the weak development effect are not transparent, preventing the player from seeing other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Although fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development effect are said to be non-transparent, this is the final display mode of fragment images 006SG302. During the 3500 ms fragment image display period, fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development effect are displayed in a transparent mode with transparency (e.g., transparency of 70% or more) for 1500 ms after display begins, then gradually change to a non-transparent mode (e.g., transparency of 70% to 10%) over 1000 ms, and then are displayed in a non-transparent mode (e.g., transparency of less than 10%) for 1000 ms.

In addition, during the weak development effect, a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (cracking effect sound output period). Along with the cracking effect sound, a weak development effect sound is also output for 3500 ms from the timing when the glass plate cracks. The cracking effect sound is louder than the weak development effect sound, making it easier for players to hear.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the previous stage operation, the illumination data table for the normal reach background image is used, thereby emitting illumination that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image; for the 4000 ms from the start of the previous stage operation to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the weak development effect is used, thereby emitting illumination that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the weak development effect; for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end of the later period of the whiteout display, the illumination data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used, thereby emitting illumination that primarily consists of white light in a manner corresponding to the break effect; and for the 2500 ms from the end of the later period of the whiteout display to the end of the fragment image display period, the illumination table for the weak development effect is used again, thereby emitting illumination in a manner corresponding to the weak development effect. Furthermore, after the light emission corresponding to the crack effect has ended, the Super Reach α background image light emission data table is used to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in accordance with the display of the Super Reach α background image (Weak S Reach effect image 006SG088).

In the weak development effect of this embodiment, an example has been given in which the background image is updated from a weak development effect background image to a Super Reach α background image from the time when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the background image is updated from a weak development effect background image to a Super Reach α background image, a whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed on the image display device 5, making the update from the weak development effect background image to the Super Reach α background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. When the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from a weak development effect background image to a Super Reach α background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout illumination data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed before the end of the fragment image display period (for example, 500 ms before the end), in which case the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will begin before the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed out of the frame.

As shown in Figures 117, 125, and 109, in the strong development effect A, first, as a preliminary action, the moving body 32 falls for 1000 ms (movable body falling period). When the falling action of the moving body 32 is completed (1000 ms has passed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach effect that had been displayed up until that point is updated to the Strong Development Effect A background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the Strong Development Effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period).

Furthermore, from the timing when the movable body 32 falls, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1500 ms to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in this embodiment of the strong development effect A, during the early whiteout display period 1500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 500 ms late whiteout display period following the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player, during which the fragment image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the strong development effect A are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

When the fragment image 006SG302 display ends, the Strong Development Presentation A background image corresponding to the Strong Development Presentation A that was displayed up until that point is updated to the Super Reach β background image corresponding to the Super Reach β reach presentation. The movable body 32, which fell as a preliminary action, is positioned in its fall position during the fragment image display period described above, and rises to its initial position for 1,500 ms from the end of the fragment image display period (movable body ascent period). From the start of the ascent of the movable body 32 (start of the movable body ascent period), a sound corresponding to the Strong Development Presentation A (Strong Development Presentation A presentation sound) is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 2,500 ms. Unlike the Weak Development Presentation, the Strong Development Presentation A does not output a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, allowing players to enjoy the unique breaking presentation of the Strong Development Presentation A. Additionally, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output during the strong development effect A. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the strong development effect A sound to a high level.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing at which the movable body 32 falls, the Super Reach α background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is produced in accordance with the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach presentation image 006SG088). From the timing at which the movable body 32 starts falling until the timing at which the fragment image display period ends, the Strong Development Presentation A illumination data table is used for 2500 ms, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is produced in accordance with the Strong Development Presentation A. Furthermore, from the timing at which the movable body 32 starts rising (the timing at which the fragment image display period ends), the Super Reach β background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is produced in accordance with the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

In the present embodiment, the strong development effect A illustrates a form in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as the early whiteout display period spanning 1500 ms from the timing of the falling of the movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the early whiteout display period of the strong development effect A may also be a period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

As shown in Figures 117, 126, 110, and 111, in strong development effect B, cracks are first displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1,500 ms without any movement of the movable body 32 or action of the character (crack display period). From the start of the crack display period, small fragment images 006SG302A, which are smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, are displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment images 006SG302A in strong development effect B and the small fragment images 006SG302A in reach suggestion effects, etc., have different parameter values for "intensity" and "repetition" as shown in Figure 130, and are therefore designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image.

When 1500 ms has passed and the crack display period has ended, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach effect that had been displayed up until that time is updated to Strong Development Effect B corresponding to Strong Development Effect B. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in this embodiment of the strong development effect B, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2500 ms period following the early whiteout display period, including the late whiteout display period, which is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302.

Fragment images 006SG302 displayed in Strong Development Performance B are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, fragment images 006SG302 in Strong Development Performance B begin displaying at normal movement speed, normal rotation speed, and normal falling speed, and then are displayed in slow motion.

When the fragment image 006SG302 display ends, the previously displayed Strong Development Effect B background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B is updated to the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the Super Reach β reach effect. Furthermore, during Strong Development Effect B, a cracking sound corresponding to the crack display is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the start of the crack display period described above (crack sound output period). From the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks until the end of the fragment image display period, a sound corresponding to Strong Development Effect B (Strong Development Effect B sound) is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms. Unlike the Weak Development Effect, the Strong Development Effect B does not output a sound effect corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, allowing players to enjoy the unique cracking effect of Strong Development Effect B. Additionally, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output during the strong development effect B. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the strong development effect B sound to be high.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image is used, thereby emitting illumination that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach α background image (image 006SG088 for weak S reach presentation), and for the 1500 ms from the start of the crack display to the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B is used, thereby emitting illumination that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner that corresponds to the strong development presentation B, and for the 1000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the end of the later period of the whiteout display, the illumination data table for the break presentation (whiteout 1000 ms) is used, thereby emitting illumination that primarily consists of white light in a manner that corresponds to the break presentation, and for the 2000 ms from the end of the later period of the whiteout display to the end of the fragment image display period, the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B is used, thereby emitting illumination in a manner that corresponds to the strong development presentation B. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the strong development effect B has ended, by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach B background image, illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

In the strong development effect B of this embodiment, an example has been given in which the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the Super Reach β background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the Super Reach β background image, a whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed on the image display device 5, making the update from the strong development effect B background image to the Super Reach β background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. When the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the Super Reach β background image in this way, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout illumination data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. In this case, the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the whiteout light emission data table are both light emission data tables that primarily emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness white light emission and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the whiteout light emission data table is executed without a flashing pattern. Also, while the crack display period for the strong development effect B is set to 1500 ms, the crack may be displayed for a period longer than 1500 ms until the crack timing. For example, the crack may be displayed so that it gradually expands at the first, second, and third timings between the start timing of Super Reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in Figures 117, 127, and 112, the cut-in effect begins with an operation prompting effect in which an operation prompting image urging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms (operation prompting effect execution period). In particular, during the execution period of the operation prompting effect in this embodiment, the operation prompting image is displayed as a pre-operation state image in which the push button 31B is in a protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation state image display period).

When the player operates push button 31B during the operation prompt effect, or when the operation prompt effect execution period ends, this timing is designated as the timing for glass plate image 006SG301A to break. The glass plate image 006SG301A, which replaced the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing when glass plate image 006SG301A breaks until the timing when the cut-in effect ends (for 5000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks), suggestive images according to the effect pattern are displayed. Additionally, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in this embodiment of the cut-in effect, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 or the suggestive image. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms period following the early whiteout display period, including the late whiteout display period, the player is able to see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image. Furthermore, for 5000 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed along with the fragment image 006SG302.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the cut-in effect are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (such as background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 during the cut-in effect begin to be displayed at normal movement speed, normal rotation speed, and normal falling speed, and then are displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a post-operation image, which shows the state after the push button 31B is operated by the player, is displayed for 1000 ms (post-operation image display period). Because the post-operation image is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303, the player can view the operation image for 1000 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

In addition, during the cut-in effect, cut-in sound corresponding to the cut-in effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cut-in effect sound output period). Note that, unlike weak development effects, the cut-in effect does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, allowing you to enjoy the breaking effect that is unique to cut-in effects. In addition, the cut-in effect may output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in which case the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the cut-in effect sound high.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the break effect by using the illumination data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms), and for the period from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the suggestive image display period, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the cut-in effect by using the illumination data table for the cut-in effect. Furthermore, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cut-in effect has ended, the Super Reach β background image light emission data table is used again to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

As shown in Figures 117, 128(A), 113, and 114, the result notification performance for a successful pattern begins with a preliminary operation in which the movable body 32 falls for 500 ms (movable fall resistance period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (500 ms has passed), a crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (crack display period). During this crack display period, from the start of the crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification presentation (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion presentation, etc., have different parameter values for "intensity" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 130, and therefore are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image. Also, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification presentation (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification presentation (failure pattern) have different parameter values for "intensity" and "repetition", and therefore are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image.

Next, when the timing arrives for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach presentation image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach presentation or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the Super Reach β reach presentation that had been displayed up until that time is updated to a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period). Although not specifically shown in Figure 128(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) after 10,000 ms has passed (before the variable display of the variable display stops), and then is updated to the jackpot game background image corresponding to the jackpot game status from the moment the variable display of the variable display stops.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the result notification presentation for the success pattern in this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. Meanwhile, during the 1000 ms following the early whiteout display period, including the late whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player, during this fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the result notification effect for successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Note that the movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 1,500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (movable body rising period).

Furthermore, in the result notification effect for a successful pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A mentioned above breaks, indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed (jackpot confirmation sound output period). Note that, unlike weak development effects, the result notification effect (success pattern) does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, allowing for convenient notification that a jackpot has been confirmed. Furthermore, the result notification effect (success pattern) may output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in which case the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the jackpot confirmation sound high.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the Super Reach α background image illumination data table or the Super Reach β background image illumination data table is used to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end of the later whiteout display period, the illumination data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used to emit light that primarily consists of white light in a manner corresponding to the break effect. Furthermore, after the illumination corresponding to the break effect has ended, the illumination data table for the jackpot notification background image is used to emit light in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot notification background image. Furthermore, once the variable display stops, the jackpot game light emission data table is used to emit light that primarily uses rainbow colors in a manner that corresponds to the display of the jackpot game background image.

As shown in Figure 128 (B), in the result notification presentation for a failure pattern, the movable body 32 does not fall, and no cracks accompanying the fall of the movable body 32 are displayed. Instead, cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5,500 ms from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A in the success pattern breaks (crack display period). Furthermore, from the start of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach presentation image 006SG088) or Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, is updated to a monochrome miss notification background image, which indicates that the variable display result is a miss. The display of the miss notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, at which point it is updated to a color eye-catching image. The display period for the eye-catching image is, for example, 1000 ms, and after the display period for the eye-catching image has ended, the display of a normal color background image (first background image 006SG081) similar to the eye-catching image begins. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification performance of this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by displaying a monochrome failure notification background image, the color eye-catching image and normal background image (first background image 006SG081) are displayed.

In addition, in the result notification effect for a failure pattern, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start of the crack display period described above (crack effect sound output period).

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image illumination data table or the Super Reach β background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).From the start of the crack display period to the stop of the variable display, the loss notification background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the loss notification background image.Furthermore, from the stop of the variable display, the normal background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Furthermore, both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the miss notification background image are light emission data tables that primarily emit white light, but whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, the white light emission based on the whiteout light emission data table is executed without a flashing pattern.

In this embodiment, for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, an example has been given in which the whiteout image 006SG303 begins to be displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 begins to be displayed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may begin to be displayed from a timing earlier than the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 begins to be displayed).

(Speed of fragments when breaking effect is executed)
Next, we will explain the display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed when the above-mentioned first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are executed.

As shown in Figure 129 (A), among these effects, the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed when the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, and the break effect as a result notification effect are executed is displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion) throughout the fragment image display period, which includes the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 129 (B), the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed when the strong development effect B and the broken effect as a cut-in effect are executed is displayed moving at a speed V1 over the 1000 ms period between the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, while during the fragment image display period after the late whiteout display period (2000 ms for the strong development effect B and 1500 ms for the cut-in effect), it is displayed moving at a speed V0 (slow motion), which is slower than speed V1. Note that Figure 129 shows the strong development effect B and the cut-in effect as effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a speed of V0, but as will be described later, in the background change effect B and the strong development effect A, the fragment image 006SG302 is also displayed and moved at a speed of V0, and when it is suggested to the player that there is a high likelihood of a jackpot, it is decided that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect B and the strong development effect A will be displayed and moved at a speed of V0 at a rate higher than speed V1.

(Details of the cracking effect)
Next, details of the break effect will be described with reference to Figures 130 and 131. Figure 130 is a diagram showing break patterns in the break effect. Figure 131 is a diagram showing display examples of each break pattern.

As shown in Figures 130 and 131, in the shattering effect executed in various effects, at a predetermined timing, some kind of impact (force) is applied from behind to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area, initiating the shattering. An animation of a shattered image of multiple fragment images 006SG302, each resembling at least a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area where the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, is displayed. In other words, the shattering effect is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area changes into a fragment image 006SG302, causing the glass plate image 006SG301A to be displayed in a shattered (broken) state. Note that in this embodiment, the shattering effect is initiated by a sphere colliding with the glass plate image 006SG301A from behind at approximately the center.

Note that the animation display of a glass plate breaking and scattering fragments is actually composed of a number of still images (e.g., approximately 30 to 100 frames) corresponding to the period during which the fragment images are displayed, but in Figure 131, five still images are extracted from the multiple still images that make up the animation display of the broken fragment images from the start to the end of the breaking effect and arranged in chronological order. Also, in Figure 131, the five frames of images for each breaking pattern are not five consecutive frames, and in reality, multiple frames of fragment images (not shown) are arranged between each frame.

When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, there are various ways in which it can break, and several types of breaking patterns (for example, breaking patterns A to G) are preset. The effect control CPU 120 can execute the breaking effect based on the preset breaking pattern depending on the type of effect being executed.

Specifically, breaking pattern A is a pattern that corresponds to the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, breaking pattern B is a pattern that corresponds to the background change effect B and the strong development effect B, breaking pattern C is a pattern that corresponds to the pseudo consecutive effect and the result notification effect (jackpot), breaking pattern D is a pattern that corresponds to the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect and the dialogue preview effect, breaking pattern E is a pattern that corresponds to the weak development effect, breaking pattern F is a pattern that corresponds to the strong development effect A, and breaking pattern G is a pattern that corresponds to the cut-in effect.

Each crack pattern A to G differs in at least one of the following: "acting agent," "crack type," "crack range," and "fragment image display type." Note that the display period and timing are as explained in Figures 116 and 117, so further explanation will be omitted below.

The "acting subject" indicates the subject of action on the glass plate image 006SG301A. For crack patterns A and E, the cracking effect is executed in response to the movement of the "character." For crack patterns C and F, the cracking effect is executed in response to the movement of the "moving object." For crack patterns B and D, the cracking effect is executed at a predetermined timing regardless of the acting subject. The "crack appearance" indicates whether the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a cracked appearance before breaking. For crack patterns A-D, the cracking effect is executed after the "crack appearance" is displayed, and for crack patterns E-G, the cracking effect is executed without displaying the "crack appearance." Note that the "crack appearance" includes multiple types of appearances that differ in display position on the display screen, number of displays, crack shape, etc. The "crack range" is the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. For crack patterns A-C and E-G, the display screen is "entire," while for crack pattern D, it is "partial." "Fragment image display mode" indicates whether fragment image 006SG302 is transparent or not; part of fragment pattern B and fragment pattern E are "non-transparent," while other fragment patterns are "transparent."

In this embodiment, light (illumination) is irradiated onto the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 from the front, approximately at the center of the display screen. Therefore, the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area. The "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 transmits light without reflecting it at a first angle (e.g., a large angle where the incident angle of the light on the glass surface is between 45 and 90 degrees), making it easy to see the lower layer image drawing area. However, at a second angle (e.g., a small angle where the incident angle of the light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), it reflects light and makes it difficult to transmit it, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area (see Figure 140). For example, of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle. Thereafter, as the multiple fragment images 006SG302 move over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the first angle. Note that the type, intensity, color, top/bottom/left/right position, and depth position of this light can also be changed in various ways, and light setting values may be varied depending on the fragment pattern.

Furthermore, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks include multiple fragment images 006SG302 with different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, etc. Furthermore, each fragment image 006SG302 moves while rotating in various directions at various speeds and orientations during the display period from when the display starts until it ends and is no longer displayed. Specifically, some fragment images 006SG302 are displayed moving in the X-axis direction (left-right direction), some in the Y-axis direction (up-down direction), and some in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and some have different movement speeds, rotation speeds, number of rotations, display periods, etc. Note that the movement direction does not only include movement in one direction among the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, but also includes movement in multiple directions among the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis (for example, the XY-axis or XY-axis directions).

In other words, in addition to the above-mentioned "acting agent," "crack type," "crack range," and "fragment image display type," each crack pattern A to G differs in at least one of the display types, such as the shape, size, rotation speed, number of rotations, movement direction [X axis (left-right direction), Y axis (up-down direction), Z axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period, of at least some of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 when they scatter.

Furthermore, crack patterns A to G are animations of cracks created, for example, using the shutter function of specified animation creation software, and the created crack patterns A to G have different values for at least some of the multiple parameters listed below.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in Figure 130, "Gravity" allows you to set gravity and adjust the acceleration at which scattered fragments gradually fall. Since it is gravity, it is not constant, but rather accelerates downwards, gradually speeding up. "Gravity Direction" allows you to set the direction in which gravity is applied, and you can specify up, down, left, and right directions with 0 degrees (upward) as the base. "Gravity Gradient" allows you to adjust gravity in the Z-axis direction (front to back), and the value set with this parameter is combined with "Gravity Direction". All directions in 3D space, including front to back, up, down, left, and right, can be specified. Note that values of "-90" and "90" are in the Z-axis direction, so "Gravity Direction" is effectively disabled. "Strength" allows you to adjust the force of scattered fragments; increasing the value will increase the speed at which the fragments fly. "Variation" adjusts the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. In the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, larger and heavier objects require more energy to move, resulting in smaller fragments moving and rotating faster, while larger and heavier fragments moving slower. The difference in physical animation due to the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0 to 100%. At 0%, size and weight are not taken into account, so small and large fragments move in the same way. The default setting of 30% is considered to be closer to the laws of physics in nature. "Repeat" adjusts the size of the fragments as they break; increasing the value results in smaller fragments and more fragments. "Viscosity" sets the resistance to the fragments' movement; increasing the value shortens the time it takes for the movement and rotation to stop. It also applies resistance to gravity, like stickiness, slowing the falling speed. In other words, increasing the "Viscosity" value slows down the movement of the fragments. Note that Figure 130 shows crack patterns B, E, and F as crack patterns in which the "viscosity" value has been adjusted to be greater than normal, but as will be described later, the "viscosity" value for crack pattern G has also been adjusted to be greater than normal.

Note that the above parameters are just examples, and other parameters that can be set include "force," which indicates the force applied at the moment that causes the glass plate image 006SG301A to break; "position," which allows adjustment of the position in the X and Y axes along which the force is applied; "depth," which allows adjustment of the position of the force in the Z axis direction (depth direction); "rotation speed," which allows setting the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate; and "randomness," which allows setting the degree of randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302.

Next, we will briefly explain the main characteristics of the movement (mainly the scattering pattern) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern.

For example, for crack patterns A, C to F, the "gravity direction" value is set to "180°," so fragment image 006SG302 breaks, scatters around, and then falls downward naturally. On the other hand, for crack patterns B and G, the "gravity direction" value is set to "0°," so fragment image 006SG302 breaks, scatters around, and then is less likely to fall downward than crack patterns A, C to F.

In this way, by setting the "gravity direction" differently for crack patterns A, C-F (first patterns) and crack patterns B, G (second patterns), the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves when displayed is different, which is "180°" for crack patterns A, C-F. This allows for a variety of patterns to be created, increasing the interest.

Furthermore, for crack patterns A, C to F, the "variation amount" value is set to "30%," so small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly, while large, heavy fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates slowly. On the other hand, for crack patterns B and G, the "variation amount" value is set to "0%," so small and large fragments of fragment image 006SG302 appear the same, making them crack patterns with a high degree of animation.

In other words, crack patterns A, C to F are affected by the animation differently depending on their size, with small fragment image 006SG302 flying quickly and large fragment image 006SG302 being slightly slower and falling quickly, making them suitable for use when you want to show realistic movement. Crack patterns B and G are all affected by the animation in the same way, flying and falling in the same way regardless of size, allowing you to select the appropriate crack pattern for your scene.

Furthermore, while the "gravity direction" setting is the same for crack patterns A and C (first patterns) and crack patterns D to F (second patterns), the "gravity value" setting is different, which results in different speeds at which the fragment images 006SG302 fall. By varying the numerical value of the parameter "gravity value" in this way and varying the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 fall, a variety of patterns can be created, adding to the fun. More specifically, because the numerical value is larger for crack patterns D to F, the fragment images 006SG302 fall faster.

In addition, for crack patterns A-C, E, and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0" or greater, so that the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as moving in the X-axis and Y-axis directions while also moving in the Z-axis direction, i.e., toward the viewer. Meanwhile, for crack patterns D and F, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0," so that the fragment image 006SG302 only moves in the X-axis and Y-axis directions, but does not move in the Z-axis direction. Note that for crack patterns A-C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as moving toward the viewer, the fragment image gradually expands, emphasizing its approach to the viewer. In particular, for crack patterns B and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "90," so that the fragment image is displayed as moving even further toward the viewer.

Furthermore, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" for crack pattern A (first pattern), crack pattern B (second pattern), and crack pattern C (third pattern), but the second parameter of "strength" is different: "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for fragment image 006SG302 while varying the second parameter to create a variety of patterns, it is possible to create stable and diverse display patterns for fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, for example, crack pattern E (first pattern), crack pattern F (second pattern), and crack pattern G (third pattern) have the following characteristics: the first parameter for "gravity" is "0" for crack pattern E and the second parameter for "strength" is "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F; whereas crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) have the first parameter for "gravity" is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and they also have the second parameter for "strength" of "5" in common. In this way, by creating common parts for each pattern in fragment image 006SG302 while being configured with different parameters, stable and diverse display patterns for fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

In this embodiment, multiple types of breaking patterns A to G with different numerical values for various parameters are pre-stored, and the breaking effect is executed based on the breaking pattern A to G corresponding to the type of effect to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the type of effect to be executed is determined by the effect control CPU 120 based on the start of variable display, the numerical values of various parameters may be determined based on the determined type of effect and the expected probability of a jackpot, and breaking animation data based on the determined numerical values may be created, and an animation display of a glass plate breaking may be displayed based on the created breaking animation data.

(Example of crack pattern display)
Next, detailed display examples of crack patterns A to G will be described with reference to Figs. 75 to 138. Fig. 75 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image for crack pattern A. Fig. 133 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image for crack pattern B. Fig. 134 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image for crack pattern C. Fig. 135 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image for crack pattern D. Fig. 136 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image for crack pattern E. Fig. 137 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image for crack pattern F. Fig. 138 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image for crack pattern G.

In Figures 75 to 138, (A1) to (A5) are display examples of breaking patterns that display the whiteout image 006SG303, and (B1) to (B5) are display examples of breaking patterns that correspond to (A1) to (A5) but do not display the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, these figures compare the cases where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and not displayed at the start of the breaking effect. Specifically, in (A1) in each figure, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is 0%, and the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3), until the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 reaches 100% in (A4).

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of Figures 75 to 138, in the animation display of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in the frame where the breaking begins (for example, (B1)), the breaking is initiated by an impact (force) being applied like a sphere colliding from behind at approximately the center of glass plate image 006SG301A, so that fragment image 006SG302 near the center of glass plate image 006SG301A starts to shatter, but the many surrounding fragment images 006SG302 have not yet started to shatter. In other words, when glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed across the entire display screen in place of glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the time of the breakage, begins to change into a broken state, a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, filling almost the entire display screen, making it almost impossible to see any images displayed in the display layer image drawing area below glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment image 006SG302.

As a result, as shown in (B1), when the cracking effect begins, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed filling almost the entire display screen over several frames, changes to a cracked state, and numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, making it difficult to see the image that was displayed before the cracking effect began. This is particularly true when the cracking effect begins after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked state, as in cracking patterns A-D. However, when the cracking effect begins suddenly without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, as in cracking patterns E-G, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed filling the display screen, suddenly changes to a cracked state, and numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, obliterating the image that was displayed before the cracking effect began, which may give the player an unnatural impression.

Therefore, at the beginning of the cracking, as shown in the early whiteout display period of (A1), by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303 in the image drawing area of the display layer 7 above the fragment image 006SG302 and hiding many of the fragment images 006SG302, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in the later period of the whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), by gradually increasing the transmittance by fading out the whiteout image 006SG303 rather than suddenly hiding it, the fragmented image 006SG302 becomes visible after it has dispersed from the center of the display screen to the periphery to some extent, allowing the fragmented image 006SG302 to appear to break up and scatter in a natural and unnatural way.

As shown in Figure 75, in crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 75 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 75 (B2)), before falling downward and being displayed out of the frame, mainly from the bottom edge (see Figures 75 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 133, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 133 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 move in normal motion, scattering radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 133 (B2)). Since they are unlikely to fall downward, they move radially from the center in slow motion and are displayed out of the frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see Figures 133 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 134, in crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 134 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 134 (B2)), before falling downward and being displayed out of the frame, mainly from the bottom edge (see Figures 134 (B3) to (B5)).

In this embodiment, an example is given in which a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as the background image when a pseudo consecutive effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, or cut-in effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, although not specifically shown, for example, a background image with a different display mode depending on the type of effect may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 135, in crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 135 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) and Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 135 (B2)), then fall downward and are displayed out of the frame, mainly from the bottom edge (see Figures 135 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 136, in crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 136 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 move in normal motion, scattering radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 136 (B2)), before falling downward in slow motion and being displayed out of the frame primarily from the bottom edge (see Figures 136 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value for crack pattern E has been adjusted to "0.4," which corresponds to Figures 136 (B3) to (B5). More specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figures 136 (B1) and (B2) has been adjusted to "0.1." Also, in Figure 136 (B1), the movable body 32 is not shown to make it easier to see when the glass plate image 006SG301A begins to break. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 in breakage pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from Figure 136 (B3), and it takes time for it to frame out. Therefore, in order to maintain the tempo of the presentation, the fragment image 006SG302 may be whited out while it is being displayed and moving in slow motion so as to be visible to the player, thereby performing the Super Reach α presentation.

As shown in Figure 137, in crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 137 (B1)), and then fragment images 006SG302 move in normal motion, scattering radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) and Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 137 (B2)). They then fall downward in slow motion, and are displayed out of the frame, mainly from the bottom edge (see Figures 137 (B3) to (B5)). Also, because the small fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate quickly, they fall and are displayed out of the frame first, whereas the large, heavy fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate more slowly, and are displayed out of the frame later than the small fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, if a crack effect occurs during a strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative symbol in the upper right corner of the reach mode display screen may be temporarily hidden, and then displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in that crack effect becomes hidden. By doing this, displays that are not closely related to the crack effect can be minimized, and the effect of the crack effect can be enhanced. In addition, if a crack effect occurs during the execution of other reach effects, such as a weak S reach effect, rather than just a strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative symbol in the reach mode may be temporarily hidden, and then displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in that crack effect becomes hidden.

As shown in Figure 138, in crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 138 (B1)). Then, fragment images 006SG302 move in a normal motion, scattering radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 138 (B2)). Since they are unlikely to fall downward, they move radially from the center in slow motion and are displayed out of the frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see Figures 138 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value for crack pattern G has been adjusted to "0.1," which corresponds to Figures 138 (B1) and (B2). More specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value for Figures 138 (B3) to (B5) has been adjusted to "0.4."

(Details of the debris image)
Next, details of the fragment images will be explained based on Fig. 139 and Fig. 140. Fig. 139 shows fragment images displayed in a pseudo consecutive performance (A) and a cut-in performance (B). Fig. 140 shows fragment images displayed in a background change performance (A) and a strong development performance (B). Note that the fragment images indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 140 indicate that they are not displayed.

As shown in Figure 139(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect is a non-transparent image (e.g., 0% transparency) that makes it difficult to recognize at least a portion of the superimposed background effect image 006SG322. Meanwhile, as shown in Figure 139(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is a transparent image (e.g., 100% transparency) that makes it possible to recognize at least a portion of the superimposed background effect image 006SG322 and text image 006SG307. This gives a suitably different impression even in effects where the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figure 139 (B), of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a cut-in effect, the first fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the background is visible) that allows at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the text is visible) that allows at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 (special image) to be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the background and text are visible) that allows both at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 to be recognized. By varying the display mode of the fragment images for each effect, the presentation effect of each effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in Figure 140 (A), all of the fragment images 006SG302 in background change performance A are hidden by moving downward toward the outside of the display screen on the image display device 5 and displaying as a frame-out display, while as shown in Figure 140 (B), the first fragment image 006SG302 of the fragment images 006SG302 in strong development performance B is hidden by moving up, down, left, and right toward the outside of the display screen and displaying as a frame-out display, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen on the image display device 5.This creates a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed between background change performance A and strong development performance B, thereby increasing interest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 140(A), when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is between 45 and 90 degrees, such as an angle where the flat surface faces the front), it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. However, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle smaller than the first angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as an angle where the end face faces the front), it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. This enhances the dramatic effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 140(A), when the first of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image is at a second angle, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

(Effects of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment displays special symbols and decorative symbols in a variable manner. When a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display of these special symbols and decorative symbols, the game can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes an image display device 5 for displaying images, and an effect control CPU 120, which is a control means for executing effects that suggest a jackpot gaming state during variable display, such as a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 60 to 62, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas for drawing images with different display priorities in a VRAM area in a display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, the VRAM area may include a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and placing background images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and placing decorative patterns as layer 2 images, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and placing object images such as characters as layer 3 images, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and placing images of precursors to cracking (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as layer 4 images, a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and placing glass plate image 006SG301A and broken glass image 006SG302 (glass shards, etc.) as layer 5 images, and a layer 6 image drawing area. It has a Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and placing an operation effect image as an image, a Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and placing a whiteout image 006SG303 as an image of Layer 7, a Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and placing an operation prompt image as an image of Layer 8, a Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and placing a variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) as an image of Layer 9, and a Layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and placing a small symbol (4th symbol), first hold memory count, second hold memory count, and right-hit notification image as an image of Layer 10. In addition, a Layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and placing an error display may also be provided.

Incidentally, except when a Layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area, the image drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area, the image drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area is the image with a higher display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area. an image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and an image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Also, although it has been described that a layer 1 image drawing area is provided for drawing and arranging a background image, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a layer 1-3 image drawing area may be provided instead of the layer 1 image drawing area. In this case, the layer 1-1 image drawing area can draw a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), the layer 1-2 image drawing area can draw a chance background image (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), a normal reach background image, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and the layer 1-3 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-4 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG323), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-5 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG324), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-6 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG325), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-7 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG326), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-8 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG327), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-9 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG328), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-10 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG329), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-11 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG329), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-12 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG329), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-13 image drawing area can draw a background effect image ( It is possible to draw an image (fifth background image 006SG085), and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area.

Here, as shown in Figures 90 to 93, background change effect A and strong development effect A are effects that can be executed at different times. Also, as shown in Figure 120, background change effect A has a crack display period in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, causing cracks to appear, and a fragment image display period in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. As shown in Figure 125, strong development effect A is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed due to the movement of the movable body 32 in a shorter period of time than the background change effect.

Furthermore, background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different before a crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, and strong development effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different before the strong development effect A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A begins. In other words, in this embodiment, background change effect A, in which cracks and fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and strong development effect A, in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed without any cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, because the types of background images displayed before and after the fragment image 006SG302 are different in both background change effect A and strong development effect A, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, different impressions can be given to the player, increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-2]
Furthermore, if background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed during variable display 1, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state may be higher when the strong development effect A is executed without the background change effect A being executed than when the strong development effect A is executed with the background change effect A being executed (see, for example, Figures 90 to 93). By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution status of the background change effect A and strong development effect A, and interest can be increased.

[Form 1-3]
Furthermore, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where it goes through background change effect A, it may also go through a chance background teaser effect different from background change effect A ( FIG. 87 ). Furthermore, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via background change effect A, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the chance background teaser effect. This draws attention to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed through background change effect A or the chance background teaser effect, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 1-4-1]
Furthermore, if background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed during variable display 1, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state may be higher when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect A is executed than when background change effect A is not executed before strong development effect A is executed (see, for example, Figures 90 to 93). By doing so, interest can be heightened by making players look forward to both background change effect A and strong development effect A being executed during variable display 1.

[Form 1-4-2]
120 and 125, during the variable display, the background change effect A is an effect executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbol, and the strong development effect A is an effect executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbol. Also, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) suggesting that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state before the reach, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) indicating that the reach effect of the super reach α is being executed, and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) indicating that the reach effect of the super reach β is being executed. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is an image displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is an image displayed together with the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), so that the player is drawn to the relationship between these background change effect A and strong development effect A, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change performance A is transparent, and therefore, through the fragment image 006SG302, the player can recognize at least a part of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. However, since the background image displayed in strong development performance A is not transparent, the player cannot recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. Therefore, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change performance A and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle due to the rotation, the player can recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302, while when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle due to the rotation, the player may find it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-5]
146, when rotating the image fragments 006SG302, when a first image fragment 006SG302 among the plurality of image fragments 006SG302 is at a first angle, a second image fragment 006SG302 among the plurality of image fragments 006SG302 may be at a second angle. This can enhance the dramatic effect when the image fragments 006SG302 are displayed.

[Form 1-5]
141 , when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction may take a longer time to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the X-axis direction. This can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance A are both displayed moving without any change in speed from the start of display to the end of display, so that the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally and without any sense of incongruity in the background change performance A and the strong development performance A.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 75 and 137), and since the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A take the same amount of time to disappear from the display screen, the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A is enhanced, thereby enhancing the effects of both performances.

[Form 1-7-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it starts to be displayed and before it is hidden on the display screen (see FIGS. 75 and 137). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it starts to be displayed and easy to see before it is hidden, which enhances the dramatic effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) takes a longer time to disappear from the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in background change performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
146, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the number of rotations from when the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed until it disappears in the display area of the image display device 5 may be the same as the number of rotations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is displayed until it disappears in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, the correlation between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A is increased, and the effects of both can be improved.

[Form 2-1]
120 and 125, in both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in these background change effect A and strong development effect A is composed of an early whiteout display period during which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period during which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, since the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed through the whiteout image 006SG303, and to execute these background change effect A and strong development effect preferably.

[Form 2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 125, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the background change performance A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the strong development performance A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms. Therefore, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, and since the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the performance effects of both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
120, the crack display period may be longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. In this way, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started without any sense of incongruity by the whiteout image 006SG303.

[Form 2-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 102 and 109, the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are images displayed in the same manner, so the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner, can be enhanced, thereby improving the performance effects of both.

[Form 3-1]
122 and 127, the pseudo consecutive effects and the cut-in effects of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive effects are displayed moving at a speed V1 regardless of the progress of the effect, while the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect change speed from V1 to a slow speed V0 depending on the progress of the effect. Therefore, even if the fragment images 006SG302 are similarly displayed, different impressions can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Form 3-2]
90 to 93, in the case where the pseudo consecutive effects can be executed multiple times in one variable display while the cut-in effect can be executed only once, it may be configured so that when the pseudo consecutive effects are executed multiple times, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the pseudo consecutive effects are executed only once, and when the cut-in effect is executed once, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the pseudo consecutive effects are executed multiple times. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the pseudo consecutive effects and the cut-in effects, and to increase interest.

[Form 3-3]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state (glass plate image 006SG301A) in the pseudo consecutive performance, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in performance, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center to the periphery of the display screen at the first timing, and is displayed across the entire display screen at the second timing (see FIGS. 105(C) and 112(C)). This differentiates the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, enhancing interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
Also, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed moving at a speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and from the moment the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, it is displayed moving at a speed V0 which is slower than speed V1, thereby enhancing the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect.

[Form 3-4-2]
Furthermore, in a case where a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a cut-in effect as shown in Fig. 127, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at speed V1, but may not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at speed V0, as shown in Fig. 129. This prevents a reduction in the effect of the cut-in effect.

[Form 3-5]
146, in the case where the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are rotatable, the number of rotations performed from the time a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotations performed from the time a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 4-1]
122 and 127, the pseudo consecutive effects and the cut-in effects of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the pseudo consecutive effects are not transparent, so that the player cannot see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the cut-in effects are transparent, so that the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, even though the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed similarly in the pseudo consecutive effects and the cut-in effects, the effects give the player different impressions and increase their interest in the game.

[Form 4-2]
Of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effects, the first fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows at least a portion of the character image 006SG307 to be recognized, and of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effects, the third fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows both at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the character image 006SG307 to be recognized (see FIG. 139 ). By varying the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each effect in this way, the presentation effect of each effect can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
146 , in a case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are rotatable, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle, it may be possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the first fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle, it may be difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-2]
146, when the image fragments 006SG302 are rotatable in a cut-in effect, when a first image fragment 006SG302 of the plurality of image fragments 006SG302 is at a first angle, a second image fragment 006SG302 of the plurality of image fragments 006SG302 may be at a second angle. This can enhance the presentation effect when the image fragments 006SG302 are displayed.

[Form 5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 122 and 127, the pseudo-consecutive effects and cut-in effects of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different times during the variable display, so the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, with regard to these pseudo-consecutive effects and cut-in effects, the cut-in effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images 006SG302 begins in a period shorter than the crack display period from when a crack appears in the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo-consecutive effect until a fragment image 006SG302 imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are both displayed in a manner moving in multiple directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction (see Figure 141), and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a manner moving in the Z-axis direction may take a longer period to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a manner moving in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it starts to be displayed and before it is hidden from the display screen (see FIGS. 134 and 138). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it starts to be displayed and easy to see before it is hidden, which enhances the dramatic effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) takes a longer time to disappear from the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in background change performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 5-4]
It is preferable that all of the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance are hidden as they move off the display screen (see, for example, FIG. 140(A)), and that the first fragment image 006SG302 of the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is hidden as they move off the display screen, and that the second fragment image 006SG302 different from the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden before moving off the display screen (see, for example, FIG. 140(B)). By doing this, the way the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed differs between the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, which increases interest.

[Form 6-1]
123 and 124, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, for these reach suggestion effect and weak development effect, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion effect is longer than the preceding operation period in the weak development effect, and the length of the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect and the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be different (see FIGS. 123 and 124). By doing so, even effects that similarly display the fragment image 006SG302 can be given different impressions, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
In addition, in the reach suggestion effect, the right crack display period may be longer than the period until the right crack display period starts in the left crack display period (see FIG. 123). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reach suggestion effect from losing interest due to a monotonous presentation configuration.

[Form 6-3]
Furthermore, the reach suggestion effect in this embodiment can be executed in a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after a crack is displayed, or in a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break because the crack is not displayed after the crack is displayed.When the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L as the right crack display period for 6000 ms, which is longer than the 2000 ms display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 when the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern, so it is possible to suitably indicate to the player that the reach suggestion effect is not executed in a success pattern, i.e., that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form 6-4-1]
Furthermore, the reach suggestion effect is an effect that notifies the player that a reach will occur when it is executed in a successful pattern, while it is an effect that suggests that a reach will not occur when it is executed in a failed pattern, that is, that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is lower than when a reach occurs.Therefore, the reach suggestion effect can draw the player's attention to whether or not the reach suggestion effect is executed and whether or not it is executed in a successful pattern, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
90 to 93, in the case where both the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be executed during the variable display of 1, the weak development effect can be executed after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect has started, and when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect has started before the weak development effect is executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state can be made higher than when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect has not started before the weak development effect is executed. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect, and interest can be increased.

[Form 6-5]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state in the reach suggestion effect, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the weak development effect, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center to the periphery of the display screen at the first timing, and is displayed across the entire display screen at the second timing (see FIGS. 106(G) and 108(D)). This allows for a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 6-6]
In the reach suggestion performance, it is possible to highlight the decorative symbols in the reach state, and by making the period during which the symbols in the reach state are highlighted during the fragment image display period longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 107(I) to 107(K)), it is possible to appropriately indicate that the reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
In the reach suggestion performance, in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, an action effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area higher than the fragment image 006SG302, and by displaying the action effect image 006SG323 at the timing when the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 starts (see Figure 106 (D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without any sense of incongruity.

[Form 6-7-2]
Also, as shown in Figure 123, in the reach suggestion presentation, depending on the action of the character, the timing at which a crack appears in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the timing at which a small fragment image 006SG302A appears in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed for a longer period of time than the action effect image 006SG323, thereby effectively indicating to the player that a crack has appeared in the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 6-7-3]
123, in the reach suggestion effect, when a character acts on the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the display of a whiteout image 006SG303 begins, but when the character acts on the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the action effect image 006SG323 is not displayed. Therefore, depending on the action of the character, a difference is made in the presentation mode of the reach suggestion effect between when a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L or the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when a character acts on the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, and thereby it is possible to prevent the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 123, in the reach suggestion effect, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period during which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (small fragment image display period), so that the presentation mode of the reach suggestion effect differs between when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when a character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as reach suggestion effects are transparent, allowing the player to see the background image through these fragment images 006SG302, whereas the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as weak development effects are not transparent, meaning that the player cannot see at least a part of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. This allows for a difference in the display mode of the fragment images 006SG302 between reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect are both displayed moving without changing speed from the start timing of the display to the end timing of the display, so that these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form 6-10]
In addition, the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be longer than the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect (see FIGS. 123 and 124). In this way, a difference is created between the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect, and interest can be increased by a variety of presentations.

[Form 7-1]
120 and 127, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effected at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 127, when the cut-in effect is executed, a pre-operation image of the push button 31B is first displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompt effect, and the cut-in effect is executed when the player operates the push button 31B or when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. During the display period of the white-out image 006SG303, the post-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in priority over the white-out image 006SG303. Here, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is 2500 ms, the display period of the pre-operation image of push button 31B is 3000 ms, and the display period of the post-operation image of push button 31B is 1000 ms, the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303.In other words, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect (cut-in image display period) is shorter than the display period of the pre-operation image of push button 31B (pre-operation image display period) and longer than the display period of the post-operation image of push button 31B (post-operation image display period), so it is possible to prevent the cut-in effect from becoming monotonous and losing its appeal.

[Form 8-1]
As shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo consecutive effect of this embodiment are effected at different times during the variable display, allowing players to be surprised at various times during the variable display. The background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive effect may be an effect in which the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period, decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a random combination, but after the fragment image 006SG302 begins to be displayed, decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination corresponding to the pseudo consecutive effect). This provides a different impression even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 8-2]
120 and 122, if a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the first-stage crack can be changed to a second-stage crack and displayed, the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo-sequential performance may be different. By doing so, the effect of displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 9-1]
120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the period during which cracks are displayed in the background change effect A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period during which cracks are displayed in the pseudo consecutive effect (crack display period) is 1500 ms, so the lengths are different. In both the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, at which point the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of these whiteout images 006SG303 is made up of an early whiteout display period during which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period during which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Therefore, the whiteout image 006SG303 reduces the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed appropriately.

[Form 9-2]
120 and 122, if a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the first-stage crack can be changed to a second-stage crack and displayed, the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo-sequential performance may be different. By doing so, the presentation effect when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 10-1]
120 and 126, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effected at different execution times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A moves without changing speed from the start to the end of the display, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B moves at speed V1 from the start to the end of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, and then moves at speed V0, which is slower than speed V1, during the transition. Therefore, even in effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, different impressions can be given, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Form 10-2]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in both the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state in the background change performance A and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development performance B, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen in the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery in the second timing (see FIGS. 102(G) and 110(H)). This differentiates the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed moving at speed V0 is longer than the period during which it is displayed moving at speed V1, so that there is a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed and moved at a speed V1 is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V0, the performance effect of the strong development performance B can be prevented from being reduced.

[Form 10-4]
Of the fragment images 006SG302 in background change performance A, all fragment images 006SG302 are hidden as they move off the display screen (see FIG. 140(A)), and of the fragment images 006SG302 in strong development performance B, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden as it moves off the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving off the display screen (see FIG. 140(B)). In this way, there is a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed between background change performance A and strong development performance B, which can increase interest.

[Form 10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are both transparent images, so the performance effect can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see FIGS. 75 and 133), and it is preferable that the period of time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B to disappear from the display screen is the same. This increases the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, thereby enhancing the effects of both performances.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it starts to be displayed and before it is hidden on the display screen (see FIGS. 75 and 133). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it starts to be displayed and easy to see before it is hidden, which can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
146, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, the number of rotations performed from the time the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotations performed from the time the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 10-7-2]
146 , when the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B are rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle, it may be possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle, it may be difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 10-7-3]
146 , in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B are rotated, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 may be at the second angle. In this way, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at the second angle.

[Form 10-8]
90 to 93, when both background change effect A and strong development effect B can be executed during variable display 1, the background change effect can be executed before the reach and the strong development effect B can be executed after the reach, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state can be made higher when the background change effect A is executed before the strong development effect B is executed than when it is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the background change effect A and increase interest.

[Form 10-9]
120 and 126, if a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the first-stage crack is changed to a second-stage crack and can be displayed, the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo-sequential effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of displaying the crack on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 11-1]
120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo consecutive effect of this embodiment are effected at different execution times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 116, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive effect is not transparent, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is transparent, so that even effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 12-1]
120 and 126, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effected at different execution times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the length of the crack display period in the background change effect A and the length of the crack display period in the strong development effect B may be made different, and the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development effect B may be displayed in a manner that moves in at least multiple directions, including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, so that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed moving in the Z-axis direction take a longer time to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed moving in the Z-axis direction, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in the strong development effect B take a longer time to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in the background change effect A. By doing this, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, it can give a different impression and increase interest in the game.

[Form 13-1]
120 and 123, the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect in this embodiment are effected at different execution times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion effect is 4000 ms, while the crack display period in the background change effect A is 2000 ms, and the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect is 1500 ms, while the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is 20000 ms. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, different impressions can be given, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 13-2]
In the first specified part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the first crack state in accordance with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth specified part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state and displayed (see Figures 106 and 102), thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the crack state.

[Form 14-1]
118, the first and second consecutive crack effects of this embodiment are executed at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the second consecutive crack effect can be executed after the first consecutive crack effect, and the first and second consecutive crack effects have the same crack display period and the same length as the fragment image display period. When the second consecutive crack effect is executed after the first consecutive crack effect is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive crack effect is temporarily hidden before the crack display period for the second consecutive crack effect begins. This prevents a reduction in the effect of the effect caused by new cracks being displayed even though the fragment image 006SG302 is already displayed.

[Form 14-2]
141, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first consecutive breaking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second consecutive breaking effect may be displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, and further, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins may be different between the first consecutive breaking effect and the second consecutive breaking effect. In this way, the way in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be made different between the first consecutive breaking effect and the second consecutive breaking effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-3]
In both the first and second consecutive breaking effects, a character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 in the first consecutive breaking effect is displayed in a first manner (for example, a Jam character image), and the character image 006SG305 in the second consecutive breaking effect is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (for example, a Mumu character image) (see Figures 99 (F) and 100 (F)).This allows for a difference in the way the special image is displayed between the first and second predetermined effects, increasing interest.

[Form 14-4]
118, the first and second cracking effects have different lengths of fragment image display periods, while the lengths of the display periods of the character image 006SG305 displayed as the result of the first and second cracking effects may be the same. This allows for a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first and second cracking effects, increasing interest.

[Form 14-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 84, in this embodiment, there are patterns in which the second consecutive break effect is executed after the first consecutive break effect is executed, and patterns in which the second consecutive break effect is not executed after the first consecutive break effect is executed. Since the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the second consecutive break effect is executed after the first consecutive break effect is executed than when the second consecutive break effect is not executed after the first consecutive break effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second consecutive break effect and increase interest.

[Form 14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment images 006SG302 in the first and second consecutive breaking effects are both displayed moving without changing speed from the display start timing to the display end timing, thereby enhancing the correlation between the first and second consecutive breaking effects and increasing interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
118, a white whiteout image 006SG303 can be displayed in common from the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the first consecutive breaking effect and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the second consecutive breaking effect may be the same. By doing so, the correlation between the first consecutive breaking effect and the second consecutive breaking effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
Furthermore, since the first and second consecutive breaking effects shown in Figure 118 have the same length of display period (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) for the whiteout image 006SG303, the correlation between the first and second consecutive breaking effects is strengthened, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 15-1]
120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect in this embodiment are effected at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as a result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state, cracks are displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. The time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A to disappear is different from the time required for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear during the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state, so the player can be properly notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

[Form 15-2]
Also, as shown in Figure 120, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A takes 2500 ms to disappear, and in the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, it takes 5500 ms for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear, so the player can be properly notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Form 15-3]
Of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A, there is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) that has the largest display size, and of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the result notification effect (lose), there is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) that has the largest display size, and it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) has a larger display size than the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) (see, for example, Figures 103(J) and 115(D)). This allows for differences in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, increasing interest.

[Form 15-4]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image that is superimposed to be recognized, and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (miss) is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image that is superimposed to be recognized (see Figure 130), which allows for differences in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and increases interest.

[Form 15-5]
It is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (miss) are displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see, for example, Figures 75 and 134). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in a related manner, which increases interest.

[Form 15-6]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed at both the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state (display of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the background change performance A and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification performance (loss), but the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed across the entire display screen at the first timing and may be displayed so that it expands from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see Figures 102(G) and 115(C)). This allows for a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the background change performance A and the result notification performance (loss), enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 16-1]
As shown in FIGS. 120 and 128 , the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are executed at different times during the variable display, allowing the player to be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, during the crack display period during the background change effect A, the game effect lamp 9 may illuminate in a manner corresponding to the background change effect A, and during the crack display period during the failure pattern result notification effect, the game effect lamp 9 may illuminate in a manner corresponding to the failure pattern result notification effect. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 may illuminate in a manner corresponding to the background change effect A until the fragment image 006SG302 begins to be displayed, while the game effect lamp 9 may illuminate in a manner corresponding to the failure pattern result notification effect until a predetermined condition is met, such as the stopping of the variable display after the failure pattern result notification effect ends or the start of the next variable display. This allows the player to be notified that the game is not being properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
When the result notification effect notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a second cracked form, and the type of background image differs between before the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form in the background change effect A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the broken effect (see Figures 102(A) to 102(F) and Figures 103(I) and 103(K)), and the display form of the background image differs between before the result notification effect notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state or not and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed when it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figures 115(A) to 115(B) and 115(D)).

By doing this, it is possible to execute background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state, giving the player a sense of surprise.Furthermore, by using the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and changing the display mode of the background image before it is announced whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, it is possible to properly notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Form 18-1]
The background change effect A is an effect including a first predetermined part that displays the character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a first cracked state in accordance with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of broken image 006SG302 that imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The pseudo-sequential effect is an effect including a fourth predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second cracked state, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of broken image 006SG302 that imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The performance includes a fifth predetermined part in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a sixth predetermined part in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The execution timing differs between the background change performance A and the pseudo-series performance, and in the breaking performance of the pseudo-series performance, the movable body 32 starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body 32 ends after the fragment image 006SG302 becomes invisible on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figures 102, 103, and 105).

By doing this, the background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, and the pseudo consecutive effects can be executed at different times, allowing players to be surprised at various times.Furthermore, by displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and then operating the movable body 32 to display the fragment image 006SG302, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect may be configured such that, after a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack. In this case, the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change effect A until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack may be different in length from the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo-continuous effect until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack. This can enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 18-3-1]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state in the background change performance A, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the pseudo consecutive performance, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see FIGS. 102(G) and 105(C)). This differentiates the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first action is a falling action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and when the movable body 32 is positioned at the performance position, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 105(C)). In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
122, in the pseudo consecutive effects, the moving body falling period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period). Here, the fragment image display period may be longer than the moving body falling period. By doing so, the effect of the pseudo consecutive effects can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
122, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 while the variable display is being executed. When a movable body suggestion effect is executed in this manner, a movable body emphasis image that highlights the movable body 32 may be displayed in a display area that overlaps the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body operates as part of the pseudo consecutive effect, the movable body emphasis image that highlights the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the pseudo consecutive effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effected at different times during the variable display, allowing the player to be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 128, the result notification effect for a successful pattern involves displaying cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, followed by the display of the fragment image 006SG302. The upward movement of the movable body 32 begins during the fragment image display period, and ends before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 to display cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect may be configured so that, after a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first-stage crack can be changed to a second-stage crack. In this case, the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change effect A until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack may be different in length from the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the result notification effect until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack. This can enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 19-3-1]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in both the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state in the background change presentation A and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification presentation (jackpot), and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see FIGS. 102(G) and 113(E)). This differentiates the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the background change presentation A and the result notification presentation (jackpot), thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the performance position toward the origin position, and when the second action starts, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 113(F)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
Furthermore, with regard to the result notification display shown in Figure 128, the period during which the movable body rises is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the fragment image display period is longer than the movable body rise period, so the presentation effect of the result notification display can be enhanced.

[Form 19-4]
128, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 while the variable display is being executed. When a movable body suggestion effect is executed in this manner, a movable body emphasis image that highlights the movable body 32 may be displayed in a display area that overlaps the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body 32 operates as a result notification effect, the movable body emphasis image that highlights the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable body emphasis image from reducing the effect of the result notification effect.

[Form 20-1]
120 and 125, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A of this embodiment are effected at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the strong development effect A is an effect in which a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is shorter than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A. Furthermore, in the strong development effect A, the movable body 32 can rise toward an upper position above the image display device 5, which is the origin position, after the fall, and the movable body 32 begins to rise after the fragment image display period ends, so that a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the effect position, and when the first action starts, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 109(B)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the effect of the strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in Figure 125, the strong development effect A has an early whiteout display period and a late whiteout display period. Here, the early whiteout display and the period during which the movable body 32 falls (movable body fall period) may be of approximately the same length, and the fragment image display period may be longer than the movable body fall period. This can enhance the presentation effect of the strong development effect.

[Form 20-3]
125 的强点显示出的显示可能是在变形中显示的强点显示的情况下，作为强点显示出的显示出。 Also, as an effect different from the strong development effect A shown in FIG. 125, as a effect different from the strong development effect A, as shown in FIG. 125, as a effect suggesting that the movable body 32 is controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display, as shown. When the movable body suggestion effect is executable in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body 32 operates as the strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be not displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body 32. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effect of the strong development effect A from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
In background change performance A and background change performance B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the background image can be seen along with the glass plate image 006SG301. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked state, the images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, are displayed with the first visibility. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in background change performance A, the first background image 006SG301 is displayed with the first visibility. 6SG081 is displayed with a second visibility that is lower than the first visibility, and the images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the specified display layer when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in background change performance B, are displayed with the second visibility over a specified range and with the first visibility over a specific range different from the specified range (for example, the crack display area 006SG324) (see Figures 102 (E), (F), and 104 (C)).

By doing this, background change effects A and B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 in different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, allowing players to be surprised at various times.Furthermore, because the visibility of the background image visible along with the glass plate image 006SG301 varies depending on the type of crack pattern, even effects that display the same glass plate image 006SG301 can give different impressions in a desirable way, increasing interest in the game.

[Form 21-2]
The boundary between the specified range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility that is higher than the first visibility and the second visibility (see enlarged view of Figure 104 (C)), thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the background change presentation B.

[Form 21-3]
In the layer 9 image drawing area, which has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to display the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and the active display 006SG103 (corresponding image) that correspond to variable display, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed in a predetermined range and not superimposed in a specific range (see Figure 104 (C)), so that the corresponding image can be displayed preferably even while the background change performance B is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
121, the second-stage crack display period may be longer than the first-stage crack display period. This allows for a difference in how the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed between background change performance A and background change performance B, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 22-1]
119 and 120, the background change effect A and the dialogue preview effect in this embodiment are effected at different execution times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. For the background change effect A and the dialogue preview effect, the visibility of the background image may be different between the crack display period in the background change effect A and the crack display period in the dialogue preview effect. Furthermore, the crack display period in the dialogue preview effect may be longer than the crack display period in the background change effect A, and multiple types of crack patterns may be provided in the dialogue preview effect (see FIGS. 102 and 101). When a glass plate image 006SG301 with a first type of second crack pattern is displayed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state may be higher than when a glass plate image 006SG301 with a second type of second crack pattern is displayed. By doing this, the player will be drawn to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the dialogue preview performance, and similarly, even in a performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a different impression will be given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 22-2]
The visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer differs between when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type with the second crack pattern is displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type with the second crack pattern is displayed (see FIGS. 102 and 101). This allows for a difference in how the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 22-3]
A whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color can be displayed in common for the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, and it is preferable that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 be different between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance (see, for example, Figures 102 and 101). In this way, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be differentiated to increase interest.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 can display a corresponding image (e.g., a first hold display 006SG101 (second hold display) or an active display 006SG103) corresponding to a variable display in a special display layer (e.g., a layer 9 image drawing area), can display a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first predetermined display layer (e.g., a layer 9-1 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the special display layer, and can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second predetermined display layer (e.g., a layer 4 image drawing area) having a lower priority than the special display layer, and Special information (e.g., small patterns) related to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the layer, and when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first predetermined display layer in background change performance A, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases, and when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the second predetermined display layer in background change performance B, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease, and when background change performance A is executed, no change performance is performed, and when background change performance B is executed, a change performance can be performed (see Figure 148).

By doing this, background change effect A and background change effect B can be executed at different times, allowing players to be surprised at various times.Furthermore, even in effects where the glass plate image 006SG301 is similarly displayed, the display layer and whether or not the change effect is executed differ, giving players a suitably different impression and increasing their interest in the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The change effect is an effect in which a character image 006SG305 is displayed and the character image 006SG305 performs an action that affects the corresponding image, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding image, and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed on a display layer (e.g., the layer 3 image drawing area) that has a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 148). By doing so, the change effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the background change effect B to a minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
In response to the operation of character image 006SG305, a change emphasis image (e.g., effect image 006SG330) can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer (see Figure 148), so that the change performance can be executed preferably even while background change performance B is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A includes an image of a suggestive mode (e.g., fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N) that suggests that a strong S reach performance (special performance) will be executed, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A (see Figures 102, 149, and 150).

By doing this, background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed at different times, allowing players to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, the display mode of fragment image 006SG302 differs between background change effect A and strong development effect A, and the correlation between fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A and the effect executed afterwards can be increased, so even effects in which fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed can give a suitably different impression, increasing interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (e.g., strong S reach effects J and N) and a second special effect (e.g., strong S reach effects A and B), and when the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the first special effect is executed, and the suggestive mode includes a first suggestive mode that suggests that the first special effect will be executed and a second suggestive mode that suggests that the second special effect will be executed (see Figures 149, 150, and 151). By doing so, it is possible to increase the attention paid to the fragment image 006SG302 (e.g., fragment image 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N) in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-3-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A includes a suggestive aspect and a transparent aspect that allows at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer to be visible, and the transparent aspect of the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed more frequently than the suggestive aspect of the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 151). By doing so, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and in the strong development effect A, the transparent fragment image 006SG302 preferably rotates more than the suggestive fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 151). By doing so, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development effect A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a suggestive mode and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the first predetermined part, and in which a single fragment image 006SG302 in a suggestive mode and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the second predetermined part (see FIG. 150). In this way, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 25]
Furthermore, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 127 is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is made invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is made transparent, and further, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is terminated, thereby making the image visible. The period during which the operation prompt effect is executed before the cut-in effect is longer than the early whiteout display period during which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) becomes invisible in the cut-in effect. Therefore, the operation prompt effect builds up to the breaking effect, and a sense of speed is created during the fragment image display period, thereby realizing an ideal breaking pattern.

[Form 26]
127, the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is made invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is made transparent, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is terminated, thereby enabling the glass plate image 006SG301A to become visible. The fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the operation prompt effect execution period. This allows the crack pattern to be more clearly seen.

[Form 27]
118 to 128, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least partially, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is shorter than the fragment image display period. Furthermore, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period and a late whiteout display period. Note that the late whiteout display period may be longer than the early whiteout display period. In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the glass plate image 006SG301A that has just started to break and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and prevents the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 28]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive break effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed to conceal from the player the beginning of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just begun to be displayed. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden after a predetermined time has passed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, allowing the player to view the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the fragment image 006SG302 begins to be displayed.

[Form 29]
118 to 128, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303, the beginning of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 during the early whiteout display period and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just begun to be displayed are hidden from the player, and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player during the later whiteout display period when the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is increased. Therefore, during the later whiteout display period, the presentation effect of the fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving after a sufficient amount of time has passed since its display began, can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
120 and 124, the fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed starting from the timing of the cracking effect, and can be moved. The transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be different between the later whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the later whiteout display period in the weak development effect. This enhances the effect of the fragment images 006SG302 that are moved during the later whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the fragment images 006SG302 that are moved during the later whiteout display period in the weak development effect.

[Form 31]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and weak development effect shown in FIGS. 120 and 124, the display of the fragment images 006SG302 begins at the timing of the execution of the break effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a moving manner. Here, the background change effect A may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is in a normal state, and the weak development effect may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is in a time-saving state or a special probability state. Furthermore, the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the later whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the later whiteout display period in the weak development effect. This enhances the effect of the moving fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the later whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the moving fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the later whiteout display period in the weak development effect.

[Form 32]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 using a light emission data table for the break effect over the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and from the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 using a light emission data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so that the light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed appropriately when the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks.

[Form 33]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least partially, and speakers 8L and 8R output the breaking effect sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 from the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 34]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the patterns of the cracking effects (the cracking patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive cracking effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed before the glass plate breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate breaks without being displayed. Here, whether or not a sound corresponding to the cracking effect (a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302) is output from speakers 8L and 8R may differ depending on whether the cracking effect is performed in the first pattern or the second pattern. This allows for different impression patterns to be provided for each cracking effect.

[Form 35]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the cracking patterns (the cracking patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) for the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed before the glass plate breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate breaks without being displayed. If the cracking effect for the result notification effect of a successful pattern can be implemented using the second pattern, the cracking effect for the successful pattern may be generated by outputting a sound from speakers 8L and 8R in response to the jackpot game state. This allows for different impression-generating cracking effect patterns depending on the state.

[Form 36]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the patterns of the cracking effects (crack patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked without any crack being displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301. When the shattering effect is performed in the first pattern, the speakers 8L and 8R output a shattering effect sound in response to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are images that replace the glass plate image 006SG301. On the other hand, when the shattering effect is performed in the second pattern, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, may not be displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R may not output a shattering effect sound in response to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, it is possible to provide shattering patterns with different impressions.

[Form 37]
118 to 128, for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 (breaking effect sound) may be output at a volume louder than the sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. This creates a contrast between when the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 are displayed, making the break pattern more memorable.

[Form 38]
145, as for the cracking effect in the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a character voice can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R as a sound corresponding to the displayed character, and when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a cracking effect sound can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R as a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, a contrast is created between when a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the cracking pattern is made more memorable.

[Form 39]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns B and G). In the first pattern, the amount of fluctuation is a specific value (e.g., "30%), so that the movement speed of a first-size fragment image 006SG302 in the first pattern is different from that of a second-size fragment image 006SG302 that is smaller than the first size. In the second pattern, the amount of fluctuation is 0 (e.g., "0%), so that the movement speed of a third-size fragment image 006SG302 in the second pattern is the same as that of a fourth-size fragment image 006SG302 that is smaller than the third size (see Figures 130 and 131).

By doing this, the first pattern is affected by the animation differently depending on the size, with small fragment images 006SG302 flying quickly and large fragment images 006SG302 flying slightly slower and falling quickly, making it a cracking pattern that can be used when you want to show realistic movement, while the second pattern is affected by the animation in the same way and causes all fragments to fly and fall in the same way regardless of size, allowing you to select the appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in a manner that gradually falls after their display begins, and there are two display patterns for the fragment images 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A and C) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns D to F). The first and second patterns have different gravity settings, which causes the fragment images 006SG302 to fall at different speeds (see Figures 130 and 131). In this way, by varying the parameters and changing the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 fall, a variety of patterns can be created, increasing the interest.

[Form 41]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns B, G), and the direction of gravity is set differently between the first and second patterns, which results in different directions in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves when displayed (see Figures 130 and 131). In this way, by varying the parameters and changing the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, a variety of patterns can be created, increasing interest.

[Form 42]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern B), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern C), where, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" among crack pattern A, crack pattern B, and crack pattern C, but the second parameter of "strength" differs between them, with crack pattern A being "5," crack pattern B being "3," and crack pattern C being "7" (see FIGS. 130 and 131). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302 while varying the second parameter to create a variety of patterns, stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

[Form 43]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern E), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern F), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern G). For example, the first parameter of "gravity" of crack pattern E (first pattern) and the second parameter of "strength" of crack pattern F (second pattern) are the same, i.e., "0," but the second parameter of "strength" of crack pattern E is "3" and the second parameter of "strength" of crack pattern F is "5." The first parameter of "gravity" of crack pattern E is "5" and the second parameter of "strength" of crack pattern F (second pattern) and the third pattern of crack G (third pattern) are the same, i.e., "5" (see FIGS. 130 and 131). In this way, by creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302 while using different parameters for each pattern, stable and diverse display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

[Form 44]
The display patterns of the broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302) include a first pattern (e.g., broken pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., broken pattern A). The broken image according to the first pattern can be displayed in the normal state, and the broken image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state (e.g., time-saving state, probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state. The type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer before and after the broken image according to the first pattern is different. It is preferable that the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before and after the broken image according to the second pattern is displayed (e.g., see Figures 102 and 103). By doing so, when using the broken patterns A to G in the normal state and when using the broken patterns A to G in the special state, different impressions are given, which can enhance interest.

[Form 45]
Background change effect A is an effect that involves displaying a cracked image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302) in a first mode and then changing to a second mode, and image display device 5 displays an effect image (e.g., whiteout image 006SG303) when displaying the cracked image in the first mode in both the normal state and a special state (e.g., time-saving state, probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, and then hides the effect image before displaying the cracked image in the second mode (see, e.g., Figures 102 and 103). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, preventing it from appearing unnatural.

[Form 46]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the patterns of the cracking effects (crack patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. Here, the first pattern of the break effect can be executed in the normal state, and the second pattern of the break effect can be executed in the time-saving state or the probability variable state. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the break effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the break effect may be displayed in a manner that moves in a common manner in multiple directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the break effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the break effect may move at different speeds. In this way, the break pattern that does not disrupt the tempo of the time-saving state or the probability variable state can enhance the presentation effect during the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

[Form 47]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the patterns of the cracking effects (crack patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. Here, the first pattern of the break effect can be executed in a normal state, and the second pattern of the break effect can be executed in a time-saving state or a probability variable state, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot when the first pattern of the break effect is executed may be different from the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot when the second pattern of the break effect is executed. By doing this, the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot differs depending on the break pattern, so that the break pattern can be more noticeable.

[Form 48]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer, and a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the specific display layer. In this case, special information (e.g., small symbols) related to the variable display can be displayed, the display periods of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 at least partially overlap, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is in a form in which a character is depicted, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is in a transparent form that allows at least a portion of a background image displayed on a display layer lower than the specific display layer to be recognized (see FIG. 151 ). In this way, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment image 006SG302 with different display modes, a memorable effect can be provided.

[Form 49]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer, and a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the specific display layer. In the image drawing area, special information (e.g., small symbols) related to the variable display can be displayed, the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 overlap at least partially, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 have different display modes, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 151 ). In this way, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes, a memorable effect can be provided.

[Form 50]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., the layer 5-1 image drawing area or the layer 5-1 image drawing area), and special information (e.g., small symbols) related to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., the layer 10 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the specific display layer. The movable body 32 can be superimposed on the image display device 5. The display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 at least partially overlap, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area where the movable body 32 does not overlap, are displayed in a larger amount than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2, which is superimposed on the movable body 32 (see FIG. 151). This allows the fragment images 006SG302 to be displayed optimally while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form 51]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, a layer 5-1 image drawing area or a layer 5-1 image drawing area), and special information (for example, small patterns) related to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (for example, a layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer. The movable body 32 can be superimposed on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the movement of the movable body 32 can be controlled. The fragment periods overlap at least partially, and a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner moving from a first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap to a second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps, while a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner moving within the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2 (see FIG. 151 ). In this manner, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the area where the movable body 32 overlaps makes the viewer aware that the piece has broken, while the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the area where the movable body 32 overlaps provides a dynamic presentation.

[Form 52]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., the layer 5-1 image drawing area or the layer 5-1 image drawing area), and special information (e.g., small symbols) related to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., the layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer. The movable body 32 can be operated to be superimposed on the image display device 5. The display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 at least partially overlap, and the fragment images 006SG302 continue to be displayed even after the movable body 32, which is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5, moves to a position where they are not superimposed on the display screen (see FIG. 151). In this manner, the fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in an optimal manner so that they are not overlooked while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

[Form 53]
In the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the image display device 5 can display a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302A), and the second type fragment images 006SG302 take a shorter time to disappear from the display screen than the first type fragment images 006SG302 (see Figures 106 and 107). By doing so, the effect of the effect using the crack pattern A can be enhanced.

[Form 54]
There are two display patterns for the broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (e.g., broken pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., broken pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed on the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern, and the type of background image displayed on the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, 106 to 108). By doing this, a specific character (for example, character image 006SG305) appears in common in multiple crack patterns, thereby increasing the attention paid to the specific character.

[Form 55]
The display patterns of the broken image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302) include a first pattern (for example, a broken pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, a broken pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. When displaying a broken image according to the first pattern, the image display device 5 displays the broken image in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. When a broken image is displayed using the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the effect image (e.g., whiteout image 006SG303) is hidden at a specific timing after the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 106 to 108). In this manner, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing the fragment image 006SG302 from appearing unnatural.

[Form 56]
There are two display patterns for broken images (e.g., fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (e.g., broken pattern E) and a second pattern (e.g., broken pattern A). The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of first-type broken images are displayed in conjunction with the movement of character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of second-type broken images are displayed in conjunction with the movement of character image 006SG305. The first-type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it moves at a speed that changes from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first-type fragment image 006SG302, and the second-type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it moves without changing speed over the display period of the second-type fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 106, 107, 102, and 103). By doing this, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed depending on the type of crack pattern, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

[Form 57]
The display patterns of the broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302) include a first pattern (e.g., broken pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., broken pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The degree of expectation of a jackpot state is different when a broken image is displayed by the first pattern and when a broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, 106, and 107). This increases the sense of anticipation for the character image 006SG305 and increases interest by drawing attention to the type of break pattern after the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the speed of the fragment image 006SG302 after the initial whiteout display period for each effect is all constant (V1 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, result notification effect, and V0 for the strong development effect B and cut-in effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as variant example 1, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the break effects for these first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may have different progression speeds (display speeds) in the left-right direction (also called the X-axis direction), up-down direction (also called the Y-axis direction), and forward direction (Z-axis direction) toward the player in the display area of the image display device 5.
The degrees may be different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 141(A), fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects of the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect may include fragment images 006SG302A moving at a speed of Vx1 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction; fragment images 006SG302B moving at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction; and fragment images 006SG302C moving at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz1 in the Z-axis direction. In addition to these, fragment images 006SG302 moving in two of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 moving in three directions may also be included.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141(B), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effects of the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect may include fragment images 006SG302A moving at a speed of Vx2 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction; fragment images 006SG302B moving at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, Vy2 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction; and fragment images 006SG302C moving at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz2 in the Z-axis direction.

Note that moving fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means enlarging and displaying fragment image 006SG302, so the speed at which fragment image 006SG302 moves in the Z-axis direction is also referred to as the enlargement display speed.

Comparing fragment image 006SG302A, which progresses only in the X-axis direction, fragment image 006SG302B, which progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in each performance, as shown in Figure 141 (C), in this variant example 1, fragment image 006SG302C, unlike fragment image 006SG302A and fragment image 006SG302B, is only enlarged and displayed toward the player, and therefore the period from the start of display to the end of display is set longer than fragment image 006SG302A and fragment image 006SG302B. In other words, in each effect's cracking effect, the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C is displayed, creating a sense of three-dimensionality for the player, and the fragment image 006SG302A continues to create a sense of three-dimensionality even after the display of fragment image 006SG302B has finished, enhancing the presentation effect when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 141 (D), the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect are grouped as effect group X, and the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the cut-in effect are grouped as effect group Y, and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the break effect of effect group X and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the break effect of effect group Y are In comparison, in this variant example 1, the Z-axis direction progression speed Vz1 of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group X is set to be faster than the Z-axis direction progression speed Vz2 of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group Y (Vz1 > Vz2), and by doing so, the period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group Y is set to be longer than that of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group X. For this reason, in this variant example 1, the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect can each be executed at different times as background change effect A and strong development effect B, which makes it possible to attract the player's attention to these effects at various times and give them a sense of surprise. Furthermore, because the period required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear differs between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, even when the same break effect is executed and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, different impressions can be given to the player depending on the effect, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In particular, in this variant 1, the effects included in effect group Y are set to have a longer period of time required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear than the effects included in effect group X, so when a cracking effect is executed as an effect included in effect group Y, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced compared to when a cracking effect is executed as an effect included in effect group X.

In addition, in this variant example 1, fragment images 006SG302 that move (enlarge) toward the player are used as fragment images 006SG302 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 that move (enlarge) toward the player may be enlarged from the display start timing to the display end timing, thereby changing their visibility. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this variant example 1, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, as shown in Figure 141 (C), fragment image 006SG302C progresses from the start of display While the example shown is one in which the period from the start of display to the end of display is set longer than for fragment image 006SG302A or fragment image 006SG302B, the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment image 006SG302C, which moves only in the Z-axis direction in a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect), may be longer than the period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment images 006SG302A and B, which move only in the X-axis or Y-axis direction in a predetermined effect (for example, a pseudo-consecutive effect) that is different from the specific effect. In this way, the display mode of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the specific effect and the predetermined effect (cut-in effect and pseudo-consecutive effect in the above example) can be made different, thereby increasing the interest in these specific and predetermined effects.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment and this variation 1, fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving them. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and fragment images displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo consecutive effect or background change effect A) With regard to the images 006SG302, all fragment images 006SG302 are made invisible by moving them completely outside the display area of the image display device 5, and with regard to the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as specific effects (for example, strong development effect B or cut-in effect), some fragment images 006SG302 may be made invisible by moving them completely outside the display area of the image display device 5, while other fragment images 006SG302 may be made invisible while they are moving outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, a difference can be made in the display mode of the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a specific effect and a specific effect, increasing the interest in these specific effects and the specific effect.

In addition, in this variation 1, an example was given in which the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as each of the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect are displayed moving in multiple directions along the X, Y, and Z axes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive break effect and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the second consecutive break effect may start from different positions. In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed differently in the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect, increasing interest.

(Variation 2)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301A is broken to display multiple fragment images 006SG302 as a breaking effect for each effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a breaking effect for each effect may differ depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in Figure 142 (A), the early whiteout display period from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the time when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed is defined as length L1, and the later whiteout display period, which is a period following the early whiteout display period and in which the whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than that in the early whiteout display period, is defined as length L2 (L2 > L1).

The fragment image display period is composed of a first fragment image display period of length L3 (L3 > L1 + L2), which is the period from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and is longer than the combined period of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, and a second fragment image display period of length L4 (L3 + L4 > L1 + L2), which is a period following the first fragment image display period.

Here, as shown in Figure 142 (B), during the second fragment image display period, by displaying a greater number of fragment images 006SG302 than during the first fragment image display period, the excitement of playing with the cracking effect can be increased. Furthermore, in this variant example 2, during the first fragment image display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 because of the whiteout image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the early whiteout display period, whereas during the period that overlaps with the late whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. Since the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is longer than the total length (L1 + L2) of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, during the early whiteout display period, making the fragment image 006SG302 invisible to the player prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable with the broken glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, and during the late whiteout display period, emphasizing the whiteout image 006SG303 more than the fragment image 006SG302 prevents the player from becoming interested in the broken glass plate image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the break effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are transparent, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the break effects of the pseudo consecutive break effect and the weak development effect are not transparent. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the break effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive break effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect may all be transparent, or may not all be transparent.

(Variation 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 143 as a modified example 3, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect has its transparency changed according to the progress of the effect (in this modified example 3, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the fragment image 006SG302 display timing) The time may be 0 at the time of the end of the first whiteout display period, T1 (T1>0) at the time of the end of the first whiteout display period, T2 (T2>T1) at the time of the end of the second whiteout display period, and T3 (T3>T2) at the time of the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so, for example, it is possible to enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is sufficiently scattered over the display area of the image display device 5 just before the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302.

In particular, in this variation 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, allowing the player to easily see the image displayed as a result of the broken effect through the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents a reduction in the effect of the effect caused by the image displayed as a result of the broken effect being obstructed by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this variation 3, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the breaking effect increases as the effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the breaking effect may decrease as the effect progresses.

(Variation 4)
Furthermore, in the modified example 3, as the breaking effects of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the form in which the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 4, as shown in Figure 144 (A) and Figure 144 (B), The transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on whether the displayed effect is a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect, or even if the effect is the same, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on the game status (Figure 144 shows an example of the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 for a background change effect A and a weak development effect).

As shown in Figure 144, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as a broken effect and the fragment image 006SG302 begins to be displayed, the whiteout display period ends and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Here, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the background change effect A's broken effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the weak development effect's broken effect have different transmittances when visible to the player, so even though both effects involve the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, it is possible to create differences in the presentation content, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the background change effect A's broken effect, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the weak development effect's broken effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as a background change effect A when executed in the normal state with the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as a weak development effect when executed in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, Because the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A and 302 when they are visible to the player is different, it is possible to create differences in the presentation content even when both involve the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. This enhances the presentation effect when glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a broken presentation for background change presentation A in the normal state, and when glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a broken presentation for weak development presentation in the time-saving state or probability variable state.

(Variation 5)
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, resulting in a cracking effect within the background change effect A or reach suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, a sound (e.g., a character voice) corresponding to the displayed character may be output. This allows for a more distinct cracking effect when a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 145 as a fifth variation, when a character voice corresponding to the character is output when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, the character voice and the cracking sound may be output at the same volume (Vol. 1 in the example of FIG. 145 ) so that the output periods of the character voice and the cracking sound overlap at least partially.

In addition, in this variant 5, as shown in Figure 145, the cracking sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed may be output at a louder volume (Vol 2 in the example of Figure 145) than the cracking sound output when a crack is displayed. By doing this, it is possible to add contrast to the cracking effect when a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and furthermore, the player can be impressed that the cracking effect is being executed as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, i.e., that these background change effect A and reach suggestion effects have been executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of these cracking effects.

(Variation 6)
In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as the shattering effects of the first consecutive shattering effect, the second consecutive shattering effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive shattering effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A shattering until the end of the display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the shattering effect of these effects may be displayed in rotation in addition to moving during the period from the start of display to the end of display. Furthermore, the number of rotations of the fragment image 006SG302 from the start of display to the end of display may differ depending on the shattering effect executed in which effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 146 as variant example 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the breaking effect of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, and the dialogue preview effect rotates R3 times from the start of display to the end of display, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the breaking effect of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A rotates R2 times (R3 > 2) from the start of display to the end of display, which is fewer than R3, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the breaking effect of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect rotates R1 times (R2 > R1) from the start of display to the end of display, which is fewer than R2.

In this way, in this variant 6, even if the timing that can be executed during the variable display is different, by having effects in which the number of rotations from the start to the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is the same, the correlation within each combination of effects is increased, such as the combination of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, and the dialogue preview effect, the combination of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, and the combination of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect, thereby enhancing the presentation effect within these combinations of effects.

Also, as mentioned above, in this variation 6, the number of rotations from the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of display varies depending on which type of break effect it is. In particular, for example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a pseudo-consecutive break effect has a greater number of rotations from the start of displaying to the end of display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cut-in break effect. This makes it possible to increase the variety of break effects executed as the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

In addition, in this Variation 6, we have illustrated a form in which the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are rotated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. During the rotation of the fragment images 006SG302, when these fragment images 006SG302 reach a first rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment images 006SG302, and when these fragment images 006SG302 reach a second rotation angle, the player can no longer see at least a portion of the background image through the fragment images 006SG302. This can enhance the presentation effect when these fragment images 006SG302 are displayed. Furthermore, in cases where the transparency of the fragment images 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment images 006SG302 as described above, rather than rotating all of the fragment images 006SG302 in synchronization, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be rotated at a different angle than the other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when one fragment image 006SG302 is rotated at the first rotation angle, some of the other fragment images 006SG302 may be rotated at the second rotation angle, thereby further enhancing the dramatic effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Variation 7)
Furthermore, as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect in the above embodiment, a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5, and then a crack effect is executed in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 7, as shown in Fig. 147(A), the pseudo-continuous effect may be such that a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or a crack is displayed as a crack display period after a preliminary operation period in which the movable body 32 falls. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 147(B), the crack display period may be configured to include a preliminary crack display period and a subsequent crack display period, as in the background change effect A of the above embodiment, so that the crack is displayed in two stages and then the crack effect is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 147(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo consecutive effects may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change effect A of the above embodiment. By doing so, even though the background change effect A of the above embodiment and the pseudo consecutive effects of this variation 7 both have two stages of cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, by making the period until the second stage of cracks is displayed different between the background change effect A and the pseudo consecutive effects, it is possible to increase the number of presentation patterns until the crack effect is executed, and to enhance the presentation effect when cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301.

Furthermore, in this variant example 7, the pseudo-consecutive effect is exemplified as an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's actions and the movable body 32's movements are performed, as in background change effect A in the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach suggestion effect may be an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's actions and the movable body 32's movements are performed, as in background change effect A in the above embodiment. Even in this case, the crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be composed of a preliminary crack display period and a final crack display period, and the length of the preliminary crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be different from the length of the preliminary crack display period in the background change effect A in the above embodiment. By doing this, even though the background change effect A of the above embodiment and the reach suggestion effect of this variant 7 both have two stages of cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, by differentiating the period until the second stage of cracks appears in the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the number of presentation patterns until the cracking effect is executed, and to enhance the presentation effect when cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301.

(Variation 8)
In the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A as crack precursor images are displayed in a layer 4 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image and the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed not only in the layer 4 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, but also in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U.

For example, in Variation 8, as shown in Figures 148 (A1) to (A5), in background change performance A, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Furthermore, as the character image 006SG305 kicks forward, cracks are displayed that spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state (see Figure 148 (A2)), the crack gradually spreads radially and changes into the crack state, and portions of the crack can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U (see Figure 148 (A3)).

When part of the crack is displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U in this way, there is a risk that the visibility of the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or the active display 006SG103 may be reduced when they are displayed. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect in which the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes is restricted, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 148 (B1) to (B5), in background change performance B, as described in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right corner of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 148 (B1)). Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 starting to descend, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, thereby gradually changing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 148 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the Layer 4 image drawing area, which is lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, even if the crack extends and appears to overlap the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the crack will not be displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U.

In addition, even when the character image 006SG305 is displayed moving across the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, rather than the character image 006SG305 being displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U (see FIG. 148 (B3)). After that, the active change effect is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see FIG. 148 (B4)).

In this way, background change effect A, which can reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and special symbol reserved memory display area 5U when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, has an execution period that overlaps with the active change effect (an effect that affects the changing character), thereby restricting the execution of an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103. On the other hand, background change effect B, which does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and special symbol reserved memory display area 5U when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, allows the execution of an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103. Even though both effects display a similar crack precursor image, the differences in the display layer and whether or not the active change effect is executed create a different impression and increase interest in the game. The target of the change effect may be the first reserved display 006SG101 or the second reserved display.

In addition, in background change effect A, part of the crack is displayed so that it overlaps the active display area 5F and special chart reserved memory display area 5U, reducing the visibility of the active display area 5F and special chart reserved memory display area 5U. However, if the display mode of the reserved display or active display changes in such a situation, it becomes difficult to tell whether the change has occurred due to the change effect or the crack mode, which can cause distrust among players. Therefore, it is preferable to be able to execute the change effect in background change effect B, which does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and special chart reserved memory display area 5U even when the crack mode is active.

In addition, in this variation 8, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state during background change effect A, the execution of the active change effect is restricted. However, for example, after the shatter effect is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 scatters, and the whiteout image 006SG303 disappears, the active change effect can be executed. In other words, it may be executed at a timing other than the original execution timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation or during a reach). The active change effect may also be executed in a simplified manner (for example, a mode in which a changing character is not displayed, and the active display mode is subtly changed at the timing of Figure 148 (A3)). In this way, by executing the change effect during a period that does not overlap with the period when the active display is difficult to see due to the shatter effect, the effects of both the shatter effect and the change effect can be enhanced.

(Variation 9)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which when a strong development effect A is executed, it is determined that the effect will develop into a strong S reach effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the breaking effect may include fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc. in a suggestive manner that suggests that one of multiple types of strong S reach effects A, B, J, N with different degrees of expectation will be executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 149 (A) to (F), when a crack effect is executed in strong development effect A, and after the whiteout image 006SG303 stops displaying and before the fragment image 006SG302 stops displaying and becomes invisible, a fragment image 006SG342M indicating that a strong S reach effect A or a strong S reach effect B will be executed, a fragment image 006SG342J indicating that a strong S reach effect J will be executed, a fragment image 006SG342N indicating that a strong S reach effect N will be executed, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see Figure 149 (G)).

Then, among the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, if fragment image 006SG342M is displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N are hidden, and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is notified that Strong S Reach Presentation A or Strong S Reach Presentation B will be executed (see Figures 150 (A1), (A2), and (A2')), and fragment image 006SG342J will be displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG If fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that a Strong S Reach effect J will be executed (see Figures 150 (B1) and (B2)); if fragment image 006SG342N is displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that a Strong S Reach effect N will be executed (see Figures 150 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing this, it is possible to increase the correlation between the fragment image in the strong development effect A and the strong S reach effect that is executed afterwards, so even if the effect also displays the fragment image 006SG302, it gives a suitably different impression and increases interest in the game.

In this modified example, the type of Strong S Reach performance to be executed is indicated by non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, which display the faces of characters of various types that appear in various Strong S Reach performances. However, the indication is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways as long as the fragment image is in a form that can identify the type of Strong S Reach performance to be executed. For example, the fragment image may display related information such as a reach title name or background image that can identify the type of Strong S Reach performance.

The type that has been decided to be executed is indicated by displaying one of the multiple fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N while the others are hidden. However, this may be indicated by, for example, displaying one of the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N larger, in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Furthermore, the Strong S Reach effect may ultimately be executed while two or more fragment images are displayed.

(Variation 10)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in one layer 5 image drawing area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the images may be displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas.

For example, in this variant 10, as shown in FIG. 151, of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the break pattern F used in the strong development effect A, the large fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent manner in the layer 5-1 image drawing area, and the small fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a non-transparent manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area above the layer 5-1 image drawing area. In this case, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a break precursor image is displayed in both the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the time of breakage. Note that one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area depicts the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach effect, as explained in variant 9.

In this way, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area depicts a character, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area is transparent, allowing at least a portion of the background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area below the layer 5-2 image drawing area to be recognized. By doing this, the display periods of two types of fragment image 006SG302 with different display modes can be overlapped to provide a memorable effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 151(B), the layer 5-1 image drawing area and layer 5-2 image drawing area are composed of a first display area L1 that does not overlap the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, and a second display area L2 that is surrounded by a two-dot chain line and indicates the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 has a larger display amount than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed optimally while the movable body 32 overlaps with the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, one of the multiple fragment images 006SG302, a first fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in a manner that moves as if entering the second display area L2 from the first display area L1, while one of the multiple fragment images 006SG302, a second fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in a manner that moves within the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the second display area L2 makes it clear that the image has broken, while the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the first display area L1 provides a dynamic presentation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301 resembling a glass plate is applied as an example of a breakage precursor image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a breakage precursor image resembling an object other than glass, such as a panel, door, or rock, may also be applied. Furthermore, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, it may be displayed with a transmittance of 100% or less than 100%. Furthermore, the breakage precursor image may be displayed in multiple layer image drawing areas so that the effect of breakage can be individually displayed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example of a fragment image was given in which a glass fragment image 006SG302 that imitates part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 as a breakage precursor image could be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that imitates at least part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a fragment image that imitates an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed in part. Furthermore, although the fragment image is displayed on a higher display layer than the breakage precursor image, it may also be displayed on a lower display layer than the breakage precursor image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, crack patterns A to G were set as the crack patterns for the crack effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute crack effects based on crack patterns other than those listed above.

In addition, while the above embodiment exemplifies a form in which a break effect can be executed during the execution of an effect such as a preview effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break effect may be executed independently of other effects. In this case, by varying the likelihood of a jackpot depending on the type of break pattern, the break effect may be executed as one of the preview effects, or may be executed as a change effect when the effect stage, effect mode, or game state changes.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the breaking effect is initiated by applying some kind of impact (force) from behind to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as the breaking precursor image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the breaking may also be initiated by applying some kind of impact (force) from the front to a predetermined position on the breaking precursor image. Furthermore, the force may be applied to multiple positions on the breaking precursor image at a predetermined timing, or at multiple timings.

In addition, in the above embodiment, depending on the type of preview performance, there are examples in which the glass plate image 006SG301 serving as a precursor to cracking changes to a cracked state before cracking begins, and in other cases in which the cracking begins suddenly without changing to a cracked state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the type of preview performance, all cracking effects may begin after the glass plate image 006SG301 serving as a precursor to cracking changes to a cracked state, or all cracking effects may begin suddenly without changing to a cracked state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the object images (characters, etc.), decorative patterns, and background images displayed in the layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and are displayed with second visibility that is lower than first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the various images displayed in the layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed with first visibility without reducing their visibility, and the cracks may be made to stand out, for example, by displaying a colored effect image or the like in the area representing the cracks.

In addition, in the above embodiment, character image 006SG305 was mainly used as an example of an object image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character type may be a type other than the above. Furthermore, various changes are possible, such as people, objects such as iron balls or rocks, or targets, rather than characters.

In addition, in the above embodiment, examples of the cracking effect include one in which the cracking is initiated in response to the movement of the object image, one in which the cracking is initiated in response to the movement of the movable body 32, and one in which the cracking is initiated regardless of the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In all effects, the cracking may be initiated in response to the movement of the object image, in all effects, the cracking may be initiated in response to the movement of the movable body 32, or in all effects, the cracking may be initiated regardless of the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. Furthermore, while the movable body 32 as a logo device is used as an example of a movable body, a board-side movable body provided elsewhere on the gaming board 2 may also be used, or a frame-side movable body provided on a gaming machine frame 3 other than the gaming board 2 may also be used. Furthermore, the cracking may be initiated in response to the movement of a movable body such as the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the breaking of the glass fragment effect begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% is displayed as an effect image on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 for a period immediately after the start of the breaking effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to display a whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the breaking effect to make it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was illustrated in which the fragment image 006SG302 is made difficult to see at the start of the breaking effect by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% on a display layer above the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased at the start of the breaking effect, in other words, the fragment image 006SG302 may be faded in to make it difficult to see at the start of the breaking effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying a crack is drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area as an image that will actually break (changing into a fragment image 006SG302). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to draw and place a glass plate image 006SG301 in the layer 4 image drawing area, and then draw and place a fragment image 006SG302 in the layer 5 image drawing area as an image of the glass plate image 006SG301 broken, without drawing and placing the glass plate image 006SG301A.

In addition, the above-described embodiment illustrates a form in which glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying in a cracked state may be different from the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying in a broken state. For example, by making the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying in a cracked state higher than the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying in a cracked state (making glass plate image 006SG301 a non-transparent image), the timing at which the cracks are displayed and the timing at which the break effect is executed can be made easier to understand than in the above-described embodiment.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the display of glass plate image 006SG301A, which changes to a cracked state, begins in the layer 5 image drawing area at the timing when glass plate image 006SG301, which is displayed in a cracked state in the layer 4 image drawing area, is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display times of glass plate image 006SG301, which is displayed in a cracked state, and glass plate image 006SG301A, which changes to a cracked state, may at least partially overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state was used as an example of a break precursor image in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The break precursor image may be an image other than the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state, as long as it is an image that suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 will break.

In addition, in the above embodiment, examples of the breaking effects of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect are given in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick (see Figure 102), a hammer (see Figure 106), a punch (see Figure 108), etc., thereby breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a form in which the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 as a breaking effect of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect, in addition to, or instead of, the kick, hammer, punch, etc., the glass plate image 006SG301A may be broken by the action of a slash with a sword or the like. In particular, the background change effects of this embodiment include background change effect A, in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick, shattering the glass plate image 006SG301A (shattering due to the kick), and background change effect B, in which the glass plate image 006SG301A shatters without the action of a character or movable object 32 (see FIG. 87). Additionally, as described above, background change effect C can be executed, in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a sword, shattering the glass plate image 006SG301A (shattering due to a sword slash). The percentage of the jackpot game state controlled may vary depending on whether or not the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 and the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. This increases the number of glass plate 006SG301A shattering effects that can be executed, and further increases the player's attention to the shattering effects.

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the breaking effects as the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was exemplified in which a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to display the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 (the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A starts to break). This increases the sense of speed from when the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed until the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, providing a powerful and memorable effect of the breakage.

Furthermore, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as a cracked effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 itself may be displayed as if it were cracked. By doing this, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 when a cracked effect is executed.

In addition, the above embodiment exemplified a form in which a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A or background change effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A or background change effect B. In particular, if a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A or background change effect B, a portion of the background image that was displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until immediately before the execution of the cracking effect may be displayed in fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, the above embodiment exemplified forms in which the break effect can be executed as a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the break effect may be executed as an effect other than these first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect. For example, during variable display, after it has been announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state that is less advantageous to the player (for example, a non-variable jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot game state of variable jackpot C with two rounds), or in the jackpot game state after the variable display ends, a promotion effect may be executed to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state of variable jackpot A with ten rounds that is controlled to a variable state after the jackpot game ends), or after it has been announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state during variable display, a break effect may be executed as a revival effect to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when executing the cracking effects as the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, an example was given in which the character or movable body 32 acts, cracks are displayed, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these cracking effects may also be executed in cases in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken without the character or movable body 32 acting, or cracks being displayed. In this way, the execution of the cracking effect can give the player a sense of surprise, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A) is used as the target for breaking the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect in the breaking effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target for these breaking effects may be an image other than the glass plate image 006SG301 or the glass plate image 006SG301A (for example, the operation prompt image 006SG310 in the case of a dialogue preview effect or cut-in effect).

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the breaking effects of the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was exemplified in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as an image above the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, thereby making at least a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A, fragment image 006SG302, and background image temporarily invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for these breaking effects, the whiteout image 006SG303 may also be displayed as an image between the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the background change effect A and the break effect of the reach suggestion effect were exemplified as a form in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back to the front of the display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. For these break effects, the character image may be drawn and positioned in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figures 3 and 4), so that the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front to the back of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a normal flat image in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In break effects such as strong development effect and cut-in effect, which, when executed, suggest that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed as a 3D image that can be viewed stereoscopically. In this way, when a strong development effect or cut-in effect is executed, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as a break effect can make the player aware that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the breaking effects of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different between the breaking effects in effects such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, which, by being executed, suggest that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, and the breaking effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. By doing this, for example, the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a breaking effect in a strong development effect or cut-in effect can be made slower than the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a breaking effect in a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, or a result notification effect. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high probability that the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 will control the game state to a jackpot when a strong development effect or cut-in effect is being executed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for the breaking effects of the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, while a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for the breaking effects of the pseudo consecutive breaking effect and weak development effect.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different for breaking effects in effects such as strong development effects and cut-in effects that, by being executed, suggest that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, and breaking effects in effects other than these strong development effects and cut-in effects. By doing this, the player can determine whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state based on the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed when the cracking effect is executed.

As described above, the present invention provides
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a light emitting means,
The game control means
variably displaying the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns;
The display device can be controlled into a normal state and a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be performed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variably displayed specific identification information,
It is possible to display a hold indicator corresponding to a variable indication of special identification information that has not yet been started;
A corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area;
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display can be performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
The variable display of the decoration identification information can be a moving display that moves the decoration identification information, and a pre-operation display that operates the decoration identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed;
variably displaying the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means;
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information,
In the display means,
It is possible to display cracked images on a specific display layer,
A background image can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer,
A display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The performance control means
When the cracked image is displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled using a specific brightness data table;
light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using the specific brightness data table until a specific timing in the display period of the broken image, and after the specific timing, light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a brightness data table corresponding to the background image;
It is characterized by:
According to the present invention, when the variable display of a specific identifier begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display. During the switching display, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identifier in a manner different from the moving display, thereby effectively utilizing the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, because the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, which tends to be monotonous, and the start of the variable display of the decorative identifier can be made more interesting. Furthermore, because a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display screen is likened to glass and a crack (a crack precursor image) is displayed on the display screen, followed by multiple fragment images as if the display screen has been broken, the light emission of the light-emitting means can be appropriately controlled, enhancing the presentation effect and increasing the interest. Thus, the present invention prevents players from feeling uncomfortable due to the unnatural display of the decorative identifier and the reserved display, thereby attracting the player's interest from the start to the end of the variable display and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, it has high marketability.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, while the above embodiment applies to a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, or assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot gaming state in which gaming balls are able to enter the jackpot entry port and more prize balls are paid out than when gaming balls enter the start entry port or the regular entry port is considered to be an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability variable state may also be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for gaming balls to enter the entry port than in a normal state or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot gaming state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that contain enclosed gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state advantageous to a player by variably displaying identification information,
A predetermined effect can be executed that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image and then displaying a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image,
As a background image after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance, any one of a plurality of background images including a first predetermined background image and a second predetermined background image which suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first predetermined background image can be displayed;
Before displaying the fragment image in the predetermined effect, the object image in any one of a plurality of object image modes can be displayed;
Depending on the aspect of the object image, it is possible to suggest which background image will be displayed after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined effect,
The game can be controlled to a plurality of game states including a predetermined state and a specific state in which the average length of the variable display period of the identification information is shorter than that of the predetermined state;
In a presentation mode including a first presentation mode in the predetermined state and a second presentation mode in the predetermined state, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed;
In the first presentation mode, when the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually increased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually decreased,
In the first presentation mode, when variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first presentation mode is started, a fade-out display of the identification information can be executed in which the transparency of the identification information corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually increased;
In the first presentation mode, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the first presentation mode is terminated, a fade-in display of the identification information can be executed in which the transparency of the identification information corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually decreased;
In the second presentation mode, when the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the second presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually increased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually decreased,
In the second presentation mode, when variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second presentation mode is started, a fade-out display of the identification information can be executed in which the transparency of the identification information corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually increased;
In the second presentation mode, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the second presentation mode is terminated, a fade-in display of the identification information can be executed in which the transparency of the identification information corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually decreased;
an execution period of the identification information fade-in display in the first presentation mode is different from an execution period of the background fade-in display;
an execution period of the identification information fade-in display in the second presentation mode is different from an execution period of the background fade-in display;
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display in the first presentation mode is different from the execution period of the background fade-out display,
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display in the second presentation mode is different from the execution period of the background fade-out display,
the identification information includes a character representation,
As variable display of the identification information, a scroll action, a pre-start action in which the character display moves before the scroll action starts, a stop action when the scroll action stops, and a post-stop action in which the character display moves after the stop action can be executed,
the character display mode is different between the action at the time of stop and the action after the stop;
The length of the execution period of the fade-out display of the identification information in the first presentation mode is different from the length of the execution period of the fade-out display of the identification information in the second presentation mode.
A gaming machine characterized by: